JP2019076434A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing a decrease in game amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine can execute a suggestion performance suggesting whether or not a state is controlled to an advantageous state according to a mode of a performance executed by predetermined performance means and display means can execute a performance assistance display related to the suggestion performance. The performance assistance display can be executed at different positions depending on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied. A specific display corresponding to a variation display can be displayed in the mode accompanied by the operation, the display mode of the specific display can be changed, a change suggestion performance suggesting change of the display mode of the specific display can be executed, and the display mode of the specific display can be changed at different rates depending on the operation mode of the specific display when the change suggestion performance is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 25

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a game machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is shot into a game area by a launch device, and the game medium becomes a prize in a prize area such as a prize hole provided in the game area and an execution condition (starting condition) is established, A pachinko game in which the game interest is enhanced by a so-called variable display game, which variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (hereinafter referred to as display symbols) on the variable display device and determines whether or not to impart predetermined gaming value There is a gaming machine. In such a pachinko gaming machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes a specific display mode, an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous for the player is obtained. For example, a pachinko gaming machine that has become a big hit gaming state opens a special electric role called a big winning opening or an attachment, and makes the winning of the gaming ball extremely easy to give the player a predetermined gaming value. Provide for a fixed time continuously. In such pachinko gaming machines, various types of effects are performed to make the player expect the display result to be in the specific display mode before the display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device.

  As such a game machine, a game machine that performs auxiliary display in accordance with the operation of the movable body is disclosed (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-104126, A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the display pattern of the auxiliary display is monotonous, and there is a possibility that the game interest may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in game fun.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is:
A gaming machine capable of controlling in an advantageous state, comprising display means (for example, the image display device 5 etc.) capable of performing variable display,
While performing the suggestion effect which suggests whether it will be controlled to the above-mentioned advantageous state by the mode of the effect performed by a predetermined production means, the presentation auxiliary display related to the suggestion effect can be executed by the display means A certain suggestion effect execution means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control that executes the processing of step S804 or step S805)
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the effect auxiliary display at different positions according to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the determination in step S 803 is YES, the process of step S 805 is performed). Etc),
further,
Corresponds to variable display in a mode with operation (for example, a mode of switching the display position to the advanced position or the retreat position, a mode of switching from a display mode of no expression to a display mode of opening eyes and flowing sweat or a display mode of flowing tears) Specific display (for example, an active display corresponding to a change under execution, a pending display corresponding to a change not started yet) can be displayed, and a display mode of the specific display (for example, display color (white, blue, red ) The active display may be displayed by performing steps S90663B and S90667B in the specific display means (for example, in the microcomputer 90100 for effect control) which may change the shape, pattern, position, range, etc. to be displayed. , Hold display is displayed by performing steps S903911 and S903929, and step S904713 is performed. A portion) for changing the specific display of the display mode by,
Change indication effect execution means (for example, in the microcomputer 90100 for effect control) that can execute change indication effects (for example, change effects (first change effect, second change effect)) that suggest changes in the display mode of the specific display In step S904506, a change effect is set, a process table corresponding to the change effect is selected in step S908004, and a portion performing change effect by performing steps S908006 and S908105).
The specific display means is an operation mode (for example, display position (advanced position, retracted position) of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed. Operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) or display direction (for example, downward, rightward) The display mode of the specific display can be changed at different rates depending on the other operation modes such as)) (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904707 to S904709). While the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 100% when the display position of the specific display which is the execution target of the first change presentation is the exit position, the specific display of the execution target of the first change presentation When the display position is the retraction position, the display mode of the specific display is not changed (the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 0%))
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the execution pattern of the presentation assistance display, and to prevent the decrease in the game entertainment. In addition, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
When the specific condition is satisfied, the suggestion effect execution means can execute the effect support display in the specific display area of the display means (for example, the movement of the movable body in the specific display area of the image display device 5) The effect image is displayed, and the movable body effect can be executed in a mode different from the normal time, etc.),
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, it can be easily recognized that the specific condition can be established, and the game interest can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
Variable display means for performing variable display;
Correspondence display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that performs hold display or active display) that performs correspondence display corresponding to variable display;
Corresponding display changing means capable of changing the display mode of the corresponding display and enlarging the display area of the corresponding display (for example, in the case where enlargement mode setting for performing enlarged display is performed in the process of step S 807) And a rendering control CPU 120 for performing enlargement control to magnify and display all the pending displays and active displays displayed on the display including the pending display of the advance notice object),
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the display mode of the correspondence display changes, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to (2) or (3),
The predetermined effect means is a movable body (e.g., a movable body 99 or the like) operable according to the effect performed by the display means.
The suggestion effect execution means is capable of operating the movable body and performing presentation support display (for example, displaying an effect image) associated with the operation of the movable body, and when the specific condition is satisfied, Unlike in the case where the specific condition is not satisfied, the auxiliary effect display is performed in the specific display area (for example, the movable body 99 is rotated as a special effect of the movable body and the small screen which is the specific display area is effective) Display an image etc.),
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform the presentation support display, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above,
Variable display means for performing variable display;
Correspondence display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that performs hold display or active display) that performs correspondence display corresponding to variable display;
Display control means (for example, CPU 120 for presentation control etc. which performs processing of Step S807 or Step S810 etc.) which controls display of the above-mentioned specific display field,
The display control means can display a display other than the correspondence display in the specific display area (for example, a display other than a display relating to a hold / active change effect such as a hold display or an active display, a character image in action effect, etc.) ),
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity which is caused by the correspondence display being displayed in a plurality of display areas.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (5) above,
The system further comprises an advance notice effect execution unit capable of executing a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S814),
The preview presentation effect execution unit can execute the plurality of types of preview presentation effects in the specific display area (if the small screen as the specific display area is displayed, the effect performed in step S814 is Small screen, etc.),
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, the visibility of the advance notice effect can be improved, and the effect of the effect can be improved, and the game interest can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (6) above,
The suggestion effect execution means can further execute a suggestion display effect different from the suggestion effect (for example, hold / active change effect, etc.),
The specific condition is satisfied by the indication effect and the indication display effect being executed in the same period (for example, the identification is performed by performing both the suspension / active change effect for performing the enlargement display and the movable object effect Conditions are met, etc.),
The indication effect execution means ends at least the indication display effect after the end of the indication effect, and ends the display by the specific display area based on the end of the indication display effect (for example, hold / active change) The effect ends after the end of the movable object effect, and the small screen as the specific display area is erased after the end of the hold / active change effect, etc.),
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to reduce (prevent) the sense of discomfort caused by the termination of the suggested effect when it is halfway.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
Variable display means for performing variable display;
Correspondence display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that performs hold display or active display) that performs correspondence display corresponding to variable display;
Correspondence display change means (for example, a notice that displays the correspondence display of the change target in a special display mode that is displayed only when the display mode of the correspondence display changes while changing the display mode of the correspondence display The effect control CPU 120 or the like, which changes the display mode of the hold display of the advance notice target so that it can be recognized which hold is the target variable display.
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, the object to be changed becomes clear, and the rendering effect can be improved.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
Variable display means for performing variable display;
Correspondence display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that performs hold display or active display) that performs correspondence display corresponding to variable display;
Correspondence display changing means (as shown in FIGS. 26 (a), (b) and (c), the character 930 holds the color ball 931 by changing the display mode of the correspondence display by causing the action display (eg ball etc.) to act. Further, the color ball 931 collides with the hold display TH and changes the color of the hold display TH, etc.) when throwing toward the display TH.
The corresponding display changing means is
The first pattern (such as a success pattern in FIGS. 26 (a), (b) and (c)) that starts the display of the action display and changes the display mode of the correspondence display after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the display of the action display And a second pattern (such as a failure pattern in FIGS. 26 (a), (b), (d)) that does not change the display mode of the correspondence display after a predetermined period has elapsed.
After the display of the action display is started, it is possible to execute deceleration control to reduce the speed of the action display with respect to the corresponding display to be made at a common timing in a predetermined period of the first pattern and the second pattern. Certainly (eg, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), deceleration of the ball speed is started at the same timing at the success and failure times, etc.)
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the action display.

  Moreover, the invention which concerns on the following (10)-(16) is included in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a specific display corresponding to a variable display (for example, a hold display corresponding to a variable display not yet executed, a variable display being executed, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-212136) It is known that there can be displayed an active display corresponding to (1), for example, a display in which the hold display is always rotated. However, in the above-described gaming machine, since the specific display only operates, the rendering effect can not be enhanced. In view of this point, provision of a gaming machine capable of enhancing the rendering effect is required.

  (10) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, and an aspect accompanied by an operation (for example, an aspect of switching a display position to an advanced position or a retracted position, Specific display corresponding to variable display (for example, active display corresponding to fluctuation during execution, still started), from a display mode of no expression to a display mode of opening eyes and a display mode of flowing sweat and a display mode of flowing tears It is possible to display the pending display corresponding to the fluctuation not displayed, and the display mode of the specific display (for example, display color (white, blue, red). It may be a shape, a pattern, a position, a range, etc. to be displayed.) (For example, in step S90663B and S90667B in the microcomputer 90100 for effect control), the active display is displayed. Display pending display by performing S903911 and S903929, and changing the display mode of the specific display by performing step S904713), and change indication effect (for example, change effect (for example, Change indication production execution means (for example, in microcomputer 90100 for effect control) which can execute the first change presentation, the second change presentation) The change presentation is set in step S904506, and the process table according to the change presentation in step S908004 Is selected, and the change display is performed by performing steps S908006 and S908105), and the specific display means is an operation mode (for example, display position (advanced position) of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is performed. , Retraction position) .Operation frequency (high frequency, low The display mode of the specific display can be changed at different rates (for example, the microcomputer 90100 for effect control) depending on the degree or the display direction (for example, downward, rightward, etc.). By performing steps S904707 to S904709, the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 100% when the display position of the specific display to be subjected to the first change effect is the advanced position, while (1) When the display position of the specific display to be subjected to the change effect is the evacuation position, the display mode of the specific display is not changed (the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 0%)) . According to such a configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display, and the rendering effect can be improved.

  (11) In the above (10), the specific display means displays the specific display in the mode with the operation regardless of whether the display mode is changed (for example, the display position (the advance position 72, and the change suggestion effect execution means can execute change suggestion effects at different rates depending on the operation mode of the specific display (for example, the microcomputer 90100 for effect control is shown in FIG. 72). By performing step S904508 using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in (C), when the operation frequency is high, the change effect (first change effect, second) is compared with the case where the operation frequency is low. Change presentation) may be performed. According to such a configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

  (12) In the above (10) or (11), the specific display means can switch between the specific operation mode (for example, advanced position) and the non-specific operation mode (for example, retracted position) and can display the specific display ( For example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can execute steps S904704, S904709, and S904710), and when the operation mode of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is performed is the specific operation mode, the display of the specific display. It is possible to change the mode (for example, by executing steps S904707 to S904713, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes the first change effect when the display position of the specific display to be executed is the advanced position. The display mode of the display may be changed). According to such a configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

  (13) In any of the above (10) to (12), the change indication effect executing means is a first change indication effect (for example, a first change effect) and a second change indication effect (for example, a second change effect). And any of the change indication effects of the plurality of change indication effects including the (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs any of the change effects by performing steps S908004, S908006, and S908105 Specific display means can switch between a specific operation mode (for example, advanced position) and a non-specific operation mode (for example, retracted position) to display a specific display (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 is Steps S904704, S904709, and S904710 can be executed), and the first change suggestion effect is executed. When the operation mode of the specific display is the specific operation mode, the display mode of the specific display can be changed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes the steps S904707 to S904713 to perform the first operation). The display mode of the specific display can be changed when the display position of the specific display which is an execution target of the change effect is the advanced position). On the other hand, when the second change suggestion effect is performed, the operation mode of the specific display is different. The display mode of the specific display can be changed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904711 to S904713 to move the display position of the specific display to be subjected to the second change effect to the advanced position The display mode of the specific display can be changed regardless of the It may be. According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be improved.

  (14) In any of the above (10) to (13), it can be suggested that the display mode of the specific display is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs the process in steps S903906 and S903924) By determining the display mode pattern using the display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 65, the reliability against the big hit (indicating white <blue <red) is indicated by the display mode, and the specific display by the operation mode of the specific display It is possible to suggest whether or not the display mode changes (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 determines the operation frequency using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 72C in step S904508). Changes the display mode of the specific display depending on the operation frequency. That reliability (low frequency <high frequency) may be suggesting) that. According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be improved.

  (15) In any of the above (10) to (14), the change suggestion effect executing means is a changed specific display whose display mode has already been changed (for example, one shown in FIGS. 78 (1) to (2) Change indication effect (eg, second change effect shown in FIGS. 78 (1) and (2)) that suggests a change in the display mode of the eye hold display 9052) and a state in which the changed specific display is displayed A change indication effect (eg, FIG. 78 (eg, 1 (FIG. 78 (1))) which indicates a change in the display mode of another specified display (eg, the second hold display 9053 shown in FIGS. 78 (1) and (4)). And (4), (5) can be performed in a mode in which at least a portion is in common (for example, a mode in which the arrow Y is flying as shown in FIG. 78 (1)) It may be According to such a configuration, it is possible to give surprise to the rendering content, and to improve the rendering effect.

  (16) In any of the above (10) to (15), the specific display means at least the specific display (for example, the hold display, the active display) corresponding to the variable display, in the normal mode (for example, "white") And a first specific mode (for example, "red") having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and a second specific mode (for example, effect-indicating display mode (for example, first special suggestion mode, second special suggestion) Can be displayed in any of the display modes (eg, “white”, “red” or the second special suggestion mode, as shown in FIG. 79). Effect display means capable of displaying the hold display) and effect executing means capable of executing the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific aspect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 79 (5) and (6) Perform special zone rendition suggested by special suggestion mode And the specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode, and then displays the specific display when the rendering of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is executed. The mode can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 79, the hold display displayed in the second special suggestion mode 5 seconds after the start of the special zone effect) 9053 may be changed to "red". According to such a configuration, the sense of expectation for the specific aspect can be enhanced.

It is a front view of a pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a production control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. It is a figure for demonstrating random value MR1-MR3. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a special figure reservation storage part. It is a flow chart which shows an example of judgment processing at the time of starting winning a prize. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol normal processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table and a big hit classification determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of pre-reading processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of pre-reading production execution setting processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a pre-reading production execution determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a final color determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an expansion aspect setting presence determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production processing under variable display. It is a timing chart in a case where suspension / active change production and movable body production which perform expansion display are performed. It is a figure which shows the example of production operation of a movable body production. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation operation example of suspension / active change presentation and movable body presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of suspension change production. It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine in the other embodiment from the front. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a production control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows 4 ms timer interruption processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern classification determination table for big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern classification determination table for loss. It is an explanatory view showing a hit change pattern judging table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss change pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of a symbol specification command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of a change category command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of a change category command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flow chart which shows production processing at the time of winning a prize. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol change. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing which CPU for production control performs. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a command receiving buffer. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of starting winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows pending | holding display control processing. It is an explanatory view showing a display mode pattern determination lottery table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a change timing determination lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a stop design of a production design. It is an explanatory view showing the example of composition of process data. It is a flowchart which shows operation frequency determination processing. It is an explanatory view showing a change production execution lottery table, an execution target determination lottery table, and an operation frequency determination lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows processing during the production design fluctuation in the production control process processing. It is an explanatory view showing a display position change lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of a presentation display apparatus when change presentation is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of a presentation display apparatus when change presentation is performed. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing a display example of a presentation effect display device when executing a second change presentation in a modification 1; FIG. 21 is an explanatory view showing a display example in the case of displaying the hold display in the second special suggestion mode in the modification 2;

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. In the game board 2, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is constituted of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of 7 segments, dot matrix, etc., and identifies each in a special view game as an example of a variable display game. Special symbols (also referred to as "special figures"), which are plural types of possible identification information (special identification information), are variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B can variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. Do.

  In addition, the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols, in which combinations of what are turned on and turned off in the 7-segment LED are different. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "the first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special view" .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is configured of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A in the special figure game and the variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display portions such as three, decorative symbols which are plural types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each are variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, on the screen of the image display device 5, decorative symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right" are arranged. Then, in response to any one of the change of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the change of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B being started in the special figure game, In each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas, fluctuation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. After that, when the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special view game, the decorative symbol is variable in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas in the image display device 5 The finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) to be displayed is stopped and displayed. The finalized decorative design may be different from the decorative design displayed during the variable display. For example, a decorative pattern other than the decorative pattern to be scrolled may be a finalized decorative pattern.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or the special figure game in synchronization with the special pattern game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B Then, variable display of a plurality of kinds of decorative symbols that can be distinguished from each other is performed, and a finalized decorative symbol to be a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "derivation"). Note that, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means to stop display (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) identification information such as a decorative symbol and to end variable display. . On the other hand, during the variable display from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when the fixed decorative symbol as the variable display result is derived and displayed, the change speed of the decorative symbol is "0", and the decorative symbol is displayed. For example, the symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, and may be in a display state that causes, for example, slight shaking or expansion and contraction. Such a display state is also referred to as a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed in a definite manner, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative symbol by the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include, for example, complete stop display of the decorative pattern only for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, one second) without causing slight shaking or expansion or contraction.

  On the screen of the image display 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is disposed. In the start winning storage display area 5H, a holding display is performed to display the number of holdings of the variable display (the number of special drawing holding memories) corresponding to the special drawing game in a distinguishable manner. Here, when the variable display corresponding to the special view game is suspended, the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A or the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B. It occurs on the basis of the start winning by (for example, passing). That is, although a start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing a variable display game such as a special view game or variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied, a variable display game based on the start condition established earlier is being executed. When the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, etc., the hold of the variable display corresponding to the satisfied start condition is To be done. In this embodiment, the hold display is performed by displaying the same number of symbols (in the present embodiment, it is a circle or the like, and hereinafter also referred to as a hold display symbol) as the variable display being held. One hold display symbol corresponds to one variable display being held. The pending variable display corresponding to the special view game using the first special view is represented by the on-hold display symbol displayed in the area on the left side in the starting winning a prize storage display area 5H. The pending variable display corresponding to the special drawing game using the second special view is represented by the holding display symbol displayed in the area on the right side in the start winning storage display area 5H.

  For example, the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start winning that the game ball enters the first start winning opening If the first start condition for starting the special view game using the first special drawing based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the number of first special view reservation memories is incremented by 1 (increment) And the execution of the special drawing game using the first special drawing is suspended. In addition, the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning that the game ball enters the second start winning opening If the second start condition for starting the special view game using the second special view based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied when the second start condition is satisfied, the number of second special view reservation storages is incremented by 1 (increment And the execution of the special drawing game using the second special drawing is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure reservation memory number is decremented by 1 and the special figure game is executed using the second special figure Is decremented by one.

  The number of pending storages of the variable display obtained by adding the number of the first special view pending storage and the number of the second special view pending storage is particularly referred to as the total pending storage number. The term "number of Tokushu reserve storages" simply refers to a concept that includes all of the number of first to reserve special storages, the number of second to reserve special storages, and the total number of pending storages, but in particular It may refer to a concept including the number of first special view pending storages and the number of second special view pending storages, but excluding the total number of pending storages.

  Along with or in place of the start winning storage display area 5H, a display may be provided to display the number of stored special figures. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning combination storage display area 5H, a first hold for specifying the number of special view hold storages to be identifiable on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first special view hold memories in an identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special view hold storage number in a distinguishable manner. The first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B are, for example, the number corresponding to the upper limit (for example, "4") in each of the first special view reserve storage number and the second special view reserve storage number (for example, 4 Components) are configured. Here, the first special view reserve storage number and the second special view reserve storage number are displayed according to the number of lighted LEDs.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, an active display area 5HA is disposed in proximity to the start winning storage display area 5H. In the active display area 5HA, display corresponding to the variable display in progress is performed. The display in the active display area 5HA is referred to as active display (also referred to as variable display correspondence display, digest display or current display). In active display area 5HA, for example, in response to the start of the special view game using the first special figure when the first start condition is satisfied, the first (first) erased (digested) in start prize storing display area 5H Active display is performed according to the hold display. Further, in the active display area 5HA, for example, the second hold storage unit 5HL is erased (digested) in response to the start of the special view game using the second special view when the second start condition is satisfied. Active display corresponding to the second hold display is performed.

  A movable body 99 is provided at a predetermined position (here, the lower center side) in the display area of the image display device 5. The movable body 99 is rotationally driven by the rotational drive of the movable body motor 61 shown in FIG.

  Below the image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A is provided, and on the right of the normal winning ball device 6A, a normal variable winning ball device 6B is provided. The regular winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 6B has an electric tulip type role having a pair of movable wing pieces that changes between a closed state in which the vertical position is achieved by the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric character shown in FIG. (Normal motorized role) is provided to form a second start winning opening.

  As an example, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric character is in the off state, so the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening Make it On the other hand, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric character is in the on state, whereby the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening. Put in a state. The normally variable winning ball device 6B is normally open when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter the second start winning port while the enlarged opening state is in the state when the solenoid 81 is on. Also, the game ball may be configured to be difficult to enter. As described above, the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the first variable state such as the opening state where the gaming ball can enter or the opening state where the game ball can enter, and the closing state where the gaming ball can not enter or entry difficulty It is configured to be changeable to a second variable state such as a normally open state. The first variable state may be a state in which the gaming ball is more likely to enter the second start winning opening than the second variable state.

  The game ball entering the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball entering the second starting winning opening formed on the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game media) based on the detection of the game balls by the first starting opening switch 22A, and the first special view reserve memory number is a predetermined number. If the upper limit value (for example, "4") or less, the first start condition is satisfied. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 22B, and the second special view reserve memory number is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit For example, the second start condition is satisfied.

  The number of winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first starting opening switch 22A and the number of the winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the second starting opening switch 22B. The numbers may be the same or different from each other. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may directly pay out the gaming balls to be the winning balls, or may give a score corresponding to the number of gaming balls to be the winning balls.

  Below the regular winning ball device 6A, a special variable winning ball device 7 is provided. The special variable winning prize ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door which is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 serving as a special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2 and a specific area which changes to an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. To form a winning opening as.

  As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning mouth door is off, the big winning mouth door closes the big winning mouth, and the game ball enters the big winning mouth (for example, Do not pass. On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning mouth door is in the on state, the big winning mouth door opens the big winning mouth, and the game ball easily enters the big winning mouth Become. As described above, the special winning opening as the specific area changes into an open state advantageous for the player to easily enter the game ball, and a closed state disadvantageously for the player because the game ball can not enter. In place of the closed state in which the game ball can not enter the big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily enter the big prize opening may be provided.

  The game ball having entered the special winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as winning balls based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23. Thus, when the game ball enters the large winning opening that is in the open state in the special variable winning ball device 7, for example, when the game ball enters the other winning opening such as the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening More prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when the special winning prize opening is opened in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, the gaming ball can enter the special winning prize opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning hole is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to get the winning ball by entering the gaming ball into the big winning hole, which is disadvantageous for the player. It becomes 2 states.

  An ordinary symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of LEDs of 7 segments or dot matrix as in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, for example, plural types different from the special symbol An ordinary symbol (also referred to as "common figure" or "ordinary figure") that is identification information is variably displayed (variable display). Such variable display of ordinary symbols is referred to as a common-play game (also referred to as a "normal-figure game"). Above the normal symbol display 20, a general drawing reserve display 25C is provided. The general drawing retention indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general drawing retention memory number as the number of effective passing balls passed through the passing gate 41.

  On the surface of the game board 2, besides the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. It may be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as winning balls based on the fact that a game ball entering one of the general winning openings is detected by a predetermined general winning ball switch. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and further, a gaming effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the gaming area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the like) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right portion of the gaming machine frame 3 is provided a striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area. For example, the hit ball operating handle adjusts the resilience of the gaming ball according to the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by the player or the like.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball and a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device (stored ) Is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower tray is provided which holds (retains) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper tray so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 31A which can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member forming the lower tray, for example, at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operating rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operating rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is hit when the player holds the operating rod). There is. The trigger button can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operation finger (for example, index finger or the like) while the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with the operation hand (for example, left hand or the like) It should just be comprised. Inside the operating rod, a trigger sensor may be incorporated so as to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button.

  A controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2) including a tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation on the operating rod may be provided in the lower main body inside the lower portion of the stick controller 31A or the like. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit may be two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) disposed parallel to the board of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod as viewed from the player facing the pachinko game machine 1 Four transmission types combining the pair) and two transmission type photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged vertically to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation stick viewed from the player's side It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

  The member forming the upper tray is, for example, a push button 31B (in which a player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray main body (for example, above the stick controller 31A)). See FIG. 2). The push button 31B may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by the player or the like. A push sensor 35B may be provided inside the main body of the upper tray or the like at the installation position of the push button 31B, for detecting a player's operation performed on the push button 31B.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13 and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Besides, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate, a touch sensor substrate, etc. are disposed on the back of the gaming board etc. in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main substrate 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control substrate consisting of a setting function of random numbers used in the special view game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch disposed at a predetermined position, etc. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the first special figure or the second special figure The variable display of a predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or performing the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 to control the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 It also has a function to control.

  On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (detection signals indicating that passage or entry of game media has been detected) from various switches for game ball detection, and transmits the signals to the microcomputer 100 for game control. The solenoid circuit 111 generates a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for driving each solenoid such as a signal for turning on or off the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) for the ordinary electric role And the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. And, various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electric component for presentation such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 performs all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, all or one of the lighting / extinguishing operations in the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. It has a function of controlling the control content for causing the electric component for effect such as a part to execute a predetermined effect operation and controlling the determined control content.

  The voice control board 13 is a control board for voice output control provided separately from the effect control board 12 and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output voice based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12 and the like. The processing circuit etc. which perform the audio | voice signal processing for this are mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12, the game effect lamp 9, decorative LED, etc. The lamp driver circuit etc. which perform lighting / extinguishing drive in are mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, detection signals from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the start port switch (the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B), and the count switch 23 are transmitted to the main substrate 11. Wiring is connected. The various switches may be of any type that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor called, for example. Further, the main substrate 11 is connected with a wire for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20 and the like.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 is relayed by the relay substrate 15. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 via the relay substrate 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. In the effect control command, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control an audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a game effect lamp 9 A lamp control command used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED or the like may be included.

  FIG. 3 is a view showing an example of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. As shown in FIG. The command 80XX (H) is a production control command (variation pattern command) for specifying a variation pattern of the production design that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns that can be used, which will be described later, there is a variation command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when the command 80XX (H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the effect pattern.

  The command 8A01 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning opening designation command) for notifying that the game ball has entered the first start winning opening. The command 8A02 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning opening designating command) for notifying that effect when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are effect control commands indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning, and are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit as the determination result at the time of winning, . Since the effect control CPU 120 determines the display result of the effect pattern in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are referred to as display result specification commands. The command 8C01 (H) (display result 1 designation command) designates a loss. The command 8C02 (H) (display result 2 designation command) designates 15R big hit and definite variation. The command 8C03 (H) (display result 3 designation command) designates 15R big hit and non-probability change.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation start designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation start designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is to be started. The first symbol variation start specification command and the second symbol variation start specification command may be generically referred to as a special symbol specification command (or a symbol variation start specification command).

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the effect symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Upon receiving the symbol determination designation command, the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display (variation display) of the effect design and derives and displays the display result.

  A command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started (initial setting). The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed (initial setting at restart). When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise initialization designation Send a command The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for specifying a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command A 001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fan fare designation command) for specifying the start of the fanfare (start of the big hit gaming state) in the case of the 15 round big hit.

  In the jackpot gaming state, the fanfare is executed first, and then the jackpot gaming which is the main of the jackpot gaming state in which the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 or the like (round game) is performed is executed. The ending is executed after the game. Fanfare is an indication or notification that the big hit gaming state has been started, that is, the big hit game is about to be started. The ending is an effect to notify that the big hit gaming state is ended, that is, the big hit game is finished.

  The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) for designating the release of the special variable winning prize ball device 7 of the number (round) indicated by XX. A3XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the special winning opening) for designating closing of the special variable winning prize ball device 7 for the number (round) indicated by XX.

  The command A 601 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for specifying start of ending.

  The command B 000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) for designating that the gaming state is the normal state (normal gaming state). The command B 001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state specifying command) for specifying that the gaming state is the time saving (favorable) state. The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (time reduction number specification command) for specifying the remaining number of time reduction (advantage) states (how many times the time reduction state continues until the variable display ends). “XX” in the command B1XX (H) indicates the remaining number of time saving (favorable) states.

  The command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number specifying command) for specifying the total pending storage number obtained by adding the first special view pending storage number and the second special view pending storage number. “XX” in the command C0XX (H) indicates the total number of pending storages. The command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number designation command) for specifying the first special view pending storage number. “XX” in the command C1XX (H) indicates the number of first special view reserved storages. The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number designation command) for specifying the second special view pending storage number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the second special view reserved storage number.

  Command C6XXH is an effect control command indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning, and as the determination result at the time of winning, a determination result as to which range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type falls (variation pattern type (Results of determination) (corresponding to the variation pattern XX). That is, as with the variation pattern command, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns that can be used, which will be described later, there is a command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a program for game control, fixed data, etc., and a work for game control. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 for executing a control operation by executing a game control program, and updating of numerical data representing a random number independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores it, and various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103 Data reading operation to read out the data, reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, to the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105 Also, a transmission operation for outputting various signals is performed.

  The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 may be at least incorporated with the RAM 102 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, etc. may be externally attached.

  In the gaming control microcomputer 100, numerical data indicating various random number values used to control the progression of the game is countable, for example, by the random number circuit 104 or the like. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers. The gaming random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 104 or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. May be For example, a random counter provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 or a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 102 indicates a predetermined random number. The random number value may be updated by storing numerical data and updating the stored value periodically or irregularly by the CPU 103.

  The ROM 101 of the microcomputer 100 for game control stores various selection data, table data, and the like used to control the progress of the game, in addition to the program for game control. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. The ROM 101 also includes table data constituting a plurality of command transmission tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of variation patterns. Table data to be configured is stored. Various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is temporarily stored in the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 in a rewritable manner.

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores effect control programs, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device 5, a random number circuit 124 for executing processing for determining control contents of the display operation in 5, and the like, the random number circuit 124 for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the effect control CPU 120, and I / O 125 And is mounted.

  As an example, the effect control board 12 executes a program for effect control read out from the ROM 121 by the effect control CPU 120 to execute a process of controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the effect control CPU 120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 121, a change data write operation in which the effect control CPU 120 writes various change data in the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 in the RAM 122 Fluctuation data reading operation to read out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, reception operation to which CPU 120 for production control receives input of various signals from outside of production control board 12, CPU 120 for production control goes to outside of production control board 12 A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control board 12 includes a wire for transmitting image data to the image display device 5 and a wire for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13. Wiring or the like for transmitting an electric decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the lamp control board 14 is connected. Furthermore, in the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a person's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected. Furthermore, the effect control board 12 is also connected with a wire for transmitting a predetermined drive command signal to the motor drive circuit 16 for driving the movable body motor 61 that causes the movable effect body 99 to rotate. .

  In the effect control board 12, for example, numerical data indicating various random number values used to control the effect operation is counted by the random number circuit 124 or the like in an updatable manner. The random number used to control such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables and the like used to control the rendering operation, in addition to the program for effect control. For example, in the ROM 121, a plurality of determination tables prepared to make various determinations, determinations, and settings by the effect control CPU 120, table data forming the determination tables, pattern data forming the various effect control patterns, etc. It is memorized. The effect control pattern is, for example, process data including effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer determination value, an end code, etc. It is configured. The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 stores various data used to control the effect operation.

  The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 generates various commands. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines the content to be displayed by the image display device 5 and outputs a display control instruction to the display control unit 123 according to the determination. The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control instruction from the effect control CPU 120, and generates the image data. For example, the display control unit 123 performs control to execute variable display of decorative symbols and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed in the display screen of the image display device 5 or the like. As an example, in the display control unit 123, a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD driving circuit, and the like may be mounted. The VDP may be a graphics processing unit (GPU), a graphics controller LSI (GCL), or a microprocessor for image processing which is more generally referred to as a digital signal processor (DSP). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or any of non-volatile recording media such as a magnetic memory and an optical memory. It may be configured.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 has, for example, an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 And including. For example, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, an instruction (sound effect signal) transmitted to the audio control board 13, and an instruction transmitted to the lamp control board 14 from the output port of the I / O 125 (Electrical decoration signal), a command (drive control signal) transmitted to the motor drive circuit 16 and the like are output.

  With the above configuration, the effect control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to display the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R via the voice control board 13 to output voice, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 or the decorative LED via the lamp control board 14 The effect image is displayed on the display area of the image display device 5 via the display control unit 123, or the movable body motor 61 is moved via the motor drive circuit 16 to move the movable body 99. In this manner, various effects (described below, such as reach effects, effects of movable effect members, and message effects such as the image display device 5 displaying an image of a message for the player, effects for exciting the game, etc.) are executed. .

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be provided based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hitting ball is launched based on the player having performed a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) the hitting operation handle installed at the lower right of the front of the case in pachinko gaming machine 1 A game ball as a game medium is shot toward the game area by a shooting motor or the like included in the device. When the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the first starting winning opening (first starting area) formed in the normal winning ball device 6A, the gaming ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 2 Thus, the first start condition is satisfied. Thereafter, based on the establishment of the first start condition, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A starts Be done.

  Also, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening (second start area) formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. The second start condition is satisfied. Thereafter, based on the establishment of the second start condition, for example, due to the end of the previous special drawing game or the big hit gaming state, the special drawing game using the second special drawing by the second special symbol display device 4B is started Be done. However, when the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normally open state or the closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the gaming ball to enter the second start winning opening.

  Based on the fact that the game ball having passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2, a common drawing start condition for executing variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 is satisfied. Thereafter, based on the fact that the common drawing start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is established, for example, that the previous common drawing game has ended, the common drawing game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In this common-play game, after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, when a predetermined time passes, the determined normal symbol as the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (common symbol per symbol) is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per common symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol in the common drawing is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "general drawing lost". In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol becoming "per common figure", the open control and the enlargement open control are performed such that the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 6B is tilted. The closing control or the normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when the predetermined time has elapsed. Whether or not to make the variable display result of the normal symbol "per common drawing" as the predetermined specific display result is the variable display result when the common pattern game by the normal symbol display 20 is started, etc. It is decided (predetermined) before deriving and displaying.

  When the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started, or when the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started It is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed, whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a "big hit" as a predetermined specific display result. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result or the variation pattern is the microcomputer 100 for gaming control of the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. From the stage to the effect control board 12.

  After the special view game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has passed, a finalized special symbol to be a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. "Left", "Medium" and "Right" decorations arranged on the screen of the image display 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, variable display of a decorative symbol (effect symbol) different from the special symbol is performed. In the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, or in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, the finalized special display result of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, a finalized ornamental symbol as a variable display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the image display device 5.

  When the jackpot symbol predetermined as the variable display result of the special symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result (special drawing display result) becomes a "big hit" (specific display result), and an advantageous value is given to the player It is controlled to the big hit game state as a specific game state. That is, whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. As the variable display result of the special symbol, the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed, and when the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result (special figure display result) becomes "loss".

  As an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is a big hit symbol, and a special symbol indicating a symbol “-” is a lost symbol. Each symbol such as a big hit symbol or lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A may be a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Also, the special symbol common to both of the special figure games may be a big hit symbol or a lost symbol.

  In the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened and the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the first state advantageous to the player. Then, continue the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) or in a period until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls enter the large winning opening and a winning ball is generated. A round game (also referred to simply as a "round") to be released is executed. In a period other than the execution period of such a round game, the special winning opening is closed, making it difficult or impossible to generate winning balls. When the gaming ball enters the big winning opening, the winning switch is detected by the count switch 23, and a predetermined number (for example, 14) of gaming balls are paid out as a winning ball each time the detection is made. The round game in the jackpot gaming state is repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (for example, "15") is reached.

  When the special figure display result is "big hit", the case where the big hit type becomes either "non-probability change" or "probability change" is included. For example, when the jackpot symbol indicating the numbers "3" and "5" is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the special symbol, the jackpot type becomes "non-probability change" and the jackpot symbol indicating the number "7" is derived and displayed When it is done, the jackpot type becomes "probable". When the jackpot type is "non-probability" or "probability", the special variable winning ball device 7 is set as the first state advantageous to the player (opening the big winning opening) as a round game in the jackpot gaming state. A normal open round is performed in which the upper limit time is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds). The jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed is also referred to as a normal opening jackpot state or a first specific gaming state.

  When the special figure display result is "big hit", the case where the big hit type becomes either "non-probability change" or "probability change" is included. For example, when the jackpot symbol indicating the number "3" is derived and displayed as the variable symbol result of the special symbol, the jackpot type becomes "non-probability change" and the jackpot symbol indicating the number "7" is jackpotted when the jackpot is displayed The type is "probable". When the jackpot type is "non-probability" or "probability", the special variable winning ball device 7 is set as the first state advantageous to the player (opening the big winning opening) as a round game in the jackpot gaming state. A normal open round is performed in which the upper limit time is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds).

  After the jackpot gaming state ends, the probability that the variable display result will be the "big hit" (big hit probability) is controlled to the positive change state higher than the normal state based on the establishment of the predetermined probability change control condition There is. The definite change state is controlled to continue until a predetermined definite change termination condition is satisfied, such as the next big hit gaming state being started. Also, after the big hit gaming state ends, the average variable display time may be controlled to a short time state where it is shorter than the normal state. The short time state has a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state, and for example, the average variable display time is different. The time saving state is controlled so as to continue until one of the time saving end conditions is first established among the fact that the variable display of the predetermined number of times has been executed and that the next big hit gaming state is started. . The definite change state is controlled so as to be continued until one of the fixed change termination conditions of the other is established first among the variable display of a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit gaming state It may be done.

  As an example, when the jackpot type is "non-deterministic", after the jackpot gaming state ends, the gaming state becomes a time saving state. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probable change" and the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state becomes a time saving state and a probability changing state.

  In the time saving state, the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening more easily than in the normal state, and the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the first variable state (open state or enlarged open state) and the second variable state Change to the closed state or the normally open state). For example, control to shorten the variation time of the normal symbol (general figure variation time) in the regular game by the regular symbol display 20 than in the normal state or the variable display result of the regular symbol in each regular game Control to improve the probability of being “per-figure” than in normal condition, tilt control time to perform tilting control of movable wing in ordinary variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result becoming “per-flat” Is changed to the first variable state and the second variable state in the advantageous change mode by the control to make the length of the ball longer than that in the normal state, and the control to increase the number of tilting times more than in the normal state. Just do it. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. As described above, control for changing the normal variable winning prize ball device 6B between the first variable state and the second variable state in the advantageous change mode is referred to as high open control (also referred to as "time-saving control" or "high base control"). Be done. By being controlled to such a short time state, the time required for the next variable display result to be a "big hit" is shortened, and a special gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is attained.

  It should be noted that the high open control is performed when the short state is said to be "high base state", "high base", etc., and the non-time-saving state is also called "low base state", "low base". The certainty state in which the certainty change control is performed is said to be “high certainty state”, “high certainty” and the like, and the gaming state not definite change state is also considered as “low certainty state” and “low certainty”. The gaming state when in a definite variation state and a short time state is also referred to as a "high probability high base state", "high probability high base", and the like. The game state when the time change state is not a definite change state is also referred to as "low probability high base state", "low probability high base", and the like. The game state when it is in a definite change state without being in a short time state is also referred to as "high probability low base state", "high probability low base", and the like. The normal state which does not become either the short time state or the definite state is also referred to as "low probability low base state", "low probability low base" and the like.

  The game ball used as a game medium in pachinko gaming machine 1 and the record information of the score given corresponding to the number thereof have a valuable value which can be exchanged for a special prize or a general prize according to the quantity, for example Just do it. Alternatively, the recorded information of the gaming balls and the scores may not be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes, but may have a valuable value that can be used for playing the game again with the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In addition, the game value that can be awarded in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the payout of the game ball serving as a winning ball or the provision of a score, and for example, control to a big hit gaming state or special gaming state such as a probability change state To control, to be the first round number (for example "15") that the upper limit number of round games that can be executed in the big hit gaming state is more than the second round number (for example "7"), execute in time saving state The upper limit number of possible variable display becomes the first number (for example, "100") that is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), and the big hit probability in the positive change state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50) The high first probability (for example, 1/20), the number of times of continuous chanting which is the number of times of being repeatedly controlled to the big hit gaming state without being controlled to the normal state is more than the second consecutive chan number (for example, "5") Many Such part or all of it to be the first communication Chang number (e.g. "10"), it may include be a more favorable game situation for the player. It should be noted that the degree of advantage for the player is, for example, a state that is actually advantageous to the player when a certain event occurs (a state in which a privilege is provided or is provided, a state in which the percentage of awarding is high) , A benefit state, etc.) or a proportion that is in an advantageous state. Also, the special feature may indicate that the possibility of giving is high, may be the same as the target of the player's advantage (the advantageous state), but different from the object of the player's advantage It may be one.

  In "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided in image display device 5, a special figure game using the first special figure in first special symbol display device 4A Among the special drawing games using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 4B, variable display of the decorative design is started in response to the start of one of the special drawing games. Then, a period from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when variable display is ended by stop display of the decorative symbol in each of the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. In the (during variable display period), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode.

  Here, with the reach mode, a decorative symbol ("reach variation symbol") which is not displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination The term “display mode” also refers to a display mode in which the fluctuation continues, or a display mode in which all or part of the decorative patterns are synchronously fluctuated while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R (for example, "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance The decorative pattern display area (for example, "inside") which is not displayed as stopped when the decorative pattern (for example, the decorative symbol showing "7" alphanumeric characters) constituting the defined big hit combination is stopped and displayed In the display mode in which the decorative pattern changes in the symbol display area 5C, etc., or the decorative pattern is a big hit in all or part of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right" It is a display mode which is fluctuating synchronously while constituting all or a part of the combination.

  In addition, in response to the reach mode, the variation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative symbol is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Or, by changing the display mode of the background image, reproducing and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, or changing the fluctuation mode of the decorative pattern, a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach mode is executed. May be Such a rendering operation such as display of a character image or change in display mode of a background image, reproduction display of a moving image, or change in change mode of a decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect display). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, etc. An operation mode different from the operation mode may be included.

  As the rendering operation in the reach rendering, a plurality of types of rendering patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (rendering modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also referred to as "reliability" or "big hit reliability", "expected degree" or "big hit expectation") differs depending on the presentation mode in each reach effect. That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be the "big hit" can be differentiated depending on which of the plurality of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, reach effects such as normal, super A, super B, and super C are set in advance as an example. The reach effects of super AC in this embodiment are reach effects in which a plurality of characters fight. Below, the reach production of super AC may be called super reach AC, and the reach production of normal may be called normal reach.

  As described above, super reach A to C in this embodiment are reach effects in which a plurality of characters fight. In the super reach A to C, for example, the characters to be fight may be different, and the super reach A to C may be set to different presentation modes. In the super A or B, when the predetermined character wins the battle, the variable display result is "big hit", and when the predetermined character loses the battle, the variable display result is "loss". If Super Reach C is executed, Super Reach A may be executed after Super Reach C is executed (it may develop into Super Reach A). When the super reach C is executed but the super reach A does not develop (for example, when the predetermined character loses the battle), the variable display result is "loss". On the other hand, in the case of developing into super reach A (for example, when a predetermined character wins a battle), the variable display result may be a "big hit".

  Depending on which reach effect is executed, the variable display result of the variable display may become "big hit" (in the present embodiment, "big hit" where the big hit type is "non-probability change" or "probability change") The jackpot expectation) changes. For example, the jackpot expectation rate is higher when super reach AC is executed than when normal reach is executed. Also, among the super reach, when super reach A (including the case of development from super reach C) is executed, super reach B is executed or super reach C is executed (super reach Big hit expectation is higher than (when it does not develop to A). On the contrary, when Super Reach C is executed, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when Super Reach B is executed or Super Reach A is executed. In this case, super reach C may be executed after the execution of super reach A (may be developed to super reach C).

  The jackpot expectation is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed at the time of big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) / {(probability that the effect will be executed at the time of big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) + (except for big hit time (Probability that the effect will be executed) × (probability that will not be a big hit)}) (If the big hit expectation is “1”, the variable display result will always be a “big hit”. Hereinafter, the big hit expectation The same for degrees).

  Unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may reach the reach state during the variable display of the decorative pattern, or the variable display result may become the "big hit", etc. A variable display effect may be executed to notify the player by a variable display mode of the decorative symbol. In this embodiment, the description is omitted to facilitate understanding, but, for example, variable display effects such as “slip” and “simulated link” can be performed. It may be determined whether or not to execute the variable display effect of “slip” or “pseudo-run” in response to the change pattern being determined on the main substrate 11 side. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display effect of “slip” is to be executed on the effect control substrate 12 side may be determined regardless of the variation pattern determined on the main substrate 11 side.

  In the variable display effect of "slip", after changing the decorative design in all of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right", a plurality of decorative design display areas (for example, After the decorative symbols are displayed on the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R etc. for a temporary stop, a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of the decorative symbol display areas displayed for temporary stop By changing the decoration pattern again in the decoration pattern display area (for example, one or both of the decoration pattern display area 5L of “left” and the decoration pattern display area 5R of “right”) The effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed. Thus, in the variable display effect of "slip", a plurality of decorative symbols are displayed temporarily for a predetermined number of times after variable display of decorative symbols is started and fixed decorative symbols to be variable display results are derived and displayed. By performing the variable display again for the decorative symbol of when the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state and when the decorative symbol that constitutes the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without being in the reach state is there.

  In the variable display effect of "pseudo ream", the variable display of the decorative symbol is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started corresponding to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being met once After displaying the decorative symbols temporarily in all of the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R until the finalized decorative symbols are derived and displayed. Effects can be displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to a maximum of three times, etc.) in which all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R change the decorative symbol again (re-fluctuating). The number of times of pseudo run variation in this embodiment is "left", "middle", "right" except for the first change from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the temporary stop of all the decorative symbols at first. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "", it indicates the number of times that the decorative symbol changes again in all.

  In the variable display effect of "pseudo ream", for example, one of a plurality of types of pseudo reciprocation chances predetermined in the left, "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R Once the decorative design that makes up the is temporarily displayed as a predetermined display result, then the variable display (re-variation) is performed again. The pseudo-continuous chance may include a combination of decorative patterns that is a predetermined non-reach combination, without the variable display mode of decorative patterns becoming a reach mode. In addition, after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the pseudo continuous chance may include the combination of the decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined reach loss combination (also simply referred to as “reach combination”). For example, a special decorative symbol (a pseudo continuous chance symbol which is not used in a variable display of a decorative symbol at a normal time) is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "middle" among the pseudo continuous chance eyes. ) May be used. Among the decorative symbols used also in the variable display of the decorative symbol at the normal time, a pseudo-continuous chance symbol which becomes a pseudo-continuous chance eye by being stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C may be included .

  In the variable display effect of "pseudo series", re-variation (pseudo series variation) is performed, and based on the first start condition or the second start condition being met once, it seems as if variable display of the decorative symbol is multiple times It can be seen as if it were started continuously.

  As the variable display effect using the variable display operation of such a decorative pattern, in addition to "slip" and "pseudo ream", for example, "development chance eye", "development chance eye end", "slip after stop chance" And various other rendering operations may be performed. Here, in the variable display effect of “the development chance eye”, “left”, “middle”, “right” until variable decoration result of the decorative symbol is started and the fixed decorative symbol as the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in all, the temporary display of the decorative symbol constituting the development chance included in the predetermined special combination, and then the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in a reach state As a predetermined reach effect is started. Thereby, when the decorative symbol constituting the development chance is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, and after the reach state, the variable display result is the "big hit". Expectations are enhanced.

  In addition, in the variable display effect of "development chance eye end", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, in all in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right" An effect display is performed in which a decorative symbol of a combination predetermined as a development opportunity is derived and displayed as a fixed decorative symbol. In the variable display effect of "slip after chance stop", similarly to the variable display effect of "pseudo ream", until after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the finalized decorative symbol to be the variable display result is derived and displayed After temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the lost combination (special combination) which becomes a pseudo recurrent chance in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the "left", "middle", and "right" Unlike the variable display effect of “pseudo series” in which the decorative symbol is again changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the decorative symbol is changed again in part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R As a result, effect display is performed to change the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed.

  In addition, unlike the variable display effect such as reach effect or “pseudo series” during the variable display of the decorative pattern, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, or an image display or an audio output as a message. The possibility that the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol may reach the reach condition by the effect operation different from the variable symbol display operation of the decorative symbol, that the reach effect by the super reach may be executed, the variable display result In some cases, a notice effect may be performed to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility that the player will be a "big hit".

  The production operation to be the advance production is the display mode of the decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" It is sufficient if it is performed (started) before the reach mode is reached (before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). Moreover, what is performed after the variable display mode of a decorative symbol turns into a reach mode may be included in the preliminary announcement effect which alert | reports that a variable display result may become a "big hit". In this manner, the notice effect can be a big hit gaming state at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started to when the finalized special symbol or the fixed decorative symbol is derived as the variable display result. It should be something that can give notice of sex. A plurality of advance notice patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the contents (effect mode) of the effect operation in the case of executing such advance effect.

  Among the advance notice effects are those that become advance read advance notice effects (also referred to as read ahead effects). In the pre-reading advance notice effect, the variable display result is “big hit” according to the presentation mode before the variable display is performed, which is the target (notice target) for which the possibility of the variable display result being “big hit” etc. It is a notice effect that can give notice of the possibility of becoming In particular, the pre-read notice effect for continuously giving notice over the variable display of the decorative symbol executed a plurality of times corresponding to a plurality of special drawing games is also referred to as a continuous notice effect. In preview advance notice effect, prior to the start of the variable display to be notified, for example, based on the pending storage of the special drawing game due to the occurrence of the start winning, etc. to notice the possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit" A presentation operation for the game is started.

  For example, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" in the variable display that is the object of advance notice by changing the display of the hold display in the start winning game storage display area 5H to a display mode different from the display mode at the normal time Pre-read notice effect of "hold display change" for giving a notice such as is performed. More specifically, the display color at the display site that displays the number of stored special images can be specified is a specific color (for example, red, green, blue, or white) different from the predetermined color (for example, gray) at the normal time. And the like (for example, a round shape) different from the shape (for example, a round shape) at the normal time, it may be notified that the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” is higher than usual. In addition, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" is higher than usual by setting the display pattern of the pending display in the start winning memory display area 5H to a specific pattern (for example, a cherry pattern etc.) different from that at normal times. May be notified. Alternatively, by providing a display mode indicating a predetermined message (for example, "secret" or the like) as the hold display, it is possible to notify (suggest) that the possibility of the display color changing to the specific color is higher than usual. Good. The pending display which suggests that such a display mode is likely to change to a specific mode is also referred to as a suggested pending display. The pre-read notice effect of "hold display change" is also referred to as hold change effect. It should be noted that, in contrast to the pre-read advance notice effect, the notice effect whose execution is started after the variable display to be a notice object is started is an independent advance notice effect (also referred to as a single advance notice, the corresponding change advance notice, or a notice announcement effect during variable display) It is called. In this embodiment, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display of the notice target is performed so that it is possible to recognize which hold the variable display to be the notice target is, as the pre-reading effect of the "hold display change". May be Specifically, an effect image indicating a prepared character (character for change effect) is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and an operation effect such as exerting an action on the hold display corresponding to the variable display to be a notice target As a result, it is possible to recognize which hold is on the variable display to be notified. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, in this embodiment, the pending display for the advance notice is the execution timing of the action effect (the timing at which it can be recognized which pending display of the variable display for the advance notice is). Although the timing at which the shift is made first is made, the execution timing of the operation effect may be determined at a different ratio depending on the variable display result, which one of the multiple shifts is to be made. Although details will be described later, there are cases where effect presentation is performed and cases where operation presentation is not performed in the look-ahead effect of “hold display change” in this embodiment, and when the effect presentation is not performed, it is for change effect The mode is changed so that it is possible to recognize which hold of the variable display to be a notice target is held without displaying the character.

  The previewing notice effect executed based on the occurrence of the start winning is executed (started) before the player can determine whether or not the notice content by the advance notice producing is realized after the occurrence of the start winning. As long as it is For example, the prefetching notice effect for informing that there is a possibility of reaching the reach state by the occurrence of a certain start winning, from at least the variable display state of the decorative symbol based on the occurrence of the start winning becomes reach state (or non reach state) What is necessary is to be executed (started) before. In addition, the pre-reading advance notice effect foretelling that the variable display result may become a "big hit" by the occurrence of a certain start winning is more than the fixed decoration symbol being stopped and displayed at least in the variable display based on the occurrence of the starting winning. What is necessary is to be executed (started) before.

  In this embodiment, as an example of a single advance notice effect, by changing the display of the effect image in the active display area 5HA to a display mode different from the display mode at the normal time, “big hit in the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied. A notice effect of “active display change” is performed to give notice of the possibility of becoming “.” More specifically, the display color in the active display area 5HA is a specific color (for example, any of red, green, blue, white, etc.) different from a predetermined color (for example, gray) at the normal time and a shape at the normal time By making the shape different, it may be informed that the possibility of the variable display result being a "big hit" is higher than usual. In addition, by making the icon displayed in the active display area 5HA a specific icon different from the round plain color at the normal time, for example, a message such as “?”, “Chance”, “extensive heat” or the like can be notified, It may be suggested that the variable display result may be a "big hit". In addition, the icon displayed in the active display area 5HA has an icon notifying a message such as "NEXT", for example, to notify that a pseudo continuous change in a variable display effect of "pseudo run" is to be performed. It is also good. The notice effect of "active display change" is also referred to as active change effect.

  Specifically, in the active change effect according to this embodiment, an effect image (effect image displayed at the time of the on-hold display effect) showing the character (character for change effect) prepared in advance is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 The display color is performed by performing an effect on the display (active display) of the active display area 5HA at the timing when the hold display (targeted display of the target of the hold change presentation) of the notice target is shifted (shifted) to the active display area 5HA. There are cases in which the display color of the active display is changed without the effect presentation being performed. As described above, in this embodiment, as the on-hold change effect, an effect of changing the display mode is performed so that it can be recognized which on-hold of the variable display to be the advance target is. Then, an active change effect is performed as a single advance notice effect, and the on-hold display in which the display mode changes changes to the active display area 5 HA, and the display color changes. That is, first, the notice target is shown in the hold change presentation, and the display color changes in the active change production (the big hit expectation is suggested). This series of productions (hold change presentation and active change presentation) In this embodiment, it is called hold / active change presentation. In this embodiment, in order to facilitate the understanding, in the pending change presentation, the player is able to recognize the advance notice object and the jackpot expectation degree is suggested by the active transition presentation (ie, in the active change presentation) Although an example in which the display color changes first) is shown, the display color may be changed in the hold change effect to indicate the jackpot expectation. Specifically, the display color may be changed in the on-hold change effect, and in the active change effect, the display color may not be changed, or the display color may be changed in the on-hold change effect, and also displayed in the active change effect. The color may be changed. For example, every time the hold display shifts in the hold change effect, the display color is changed stepwise (including when it is not changed even when the shift is made), and active shift effect is performed when shifting to the active display area 5HA. The color may be changed (the effect of the cast may be performed). Further, in the on-hold / active change presentation in this embodiment, all the on-hold displays and active displays displayed on the display including the on-hold display of the notice target may be enlarged and displayed. Specifically, although it will be described later, in the suspension / active change presentation, when the suspension / active change presentation is started, in which the display color changes to green or red, it is being displayed for a period until the suspension / active change presentation ends All the pending display and the active display may be enlarged (the enlarged display is not performed in the pending / active change effect in which the display color changes to white or blue). In addition, when the hold / active change effect to be enlarged is started, a small screen as a specific display area is displayed in the image display device 5 and an image displayed in the hold / active change effect (for example, a hold display) All displays other than the active display, the character image in the action effect, etc.) are performed on the small screen as the specific display area. The small screen display ends when the hold / active change effect ends (display control in the specific display area ends). The various images displayed on the small screen may have the same ratio as the image displayed on the image display 5 (for example, the screen size of the image display 5 is 10 and the screen size of the small screen If 1 is 1, the image displayed on the small screen should have a ratio of 1/10 of the size displayed on the image display device 5). Further, in this embodiment, when enlargement display is not performed, no effect presentation is performed in the hold / active change presentation, but, for example, an effect presentation is performed by displaying a small character image, etc. You may perform an effect presentation by the aspect different from the case where enlarged display is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, as the pre-reading advance notice effect, the movable body is displayed each time the variable display is performed during a period until the variable display corresponding to the suspension of the preview object is performed (including the variable display of the suspension of the preview object). A movable body effect to rotate 99 is executed. Specifically, the movable body effect is performed in a plurality of variable displays until variable display of the hold of the advance notice is performed, and is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of each variable display. At that time, in the image display device 5, an effect image is displayed, and a display is performed to effectively make the movable body 99 operate.

  That is, in this embodiment, two types of pre-reading effects such as hold / active change effect and movable object effect are performed, but these may be performed independently or may be performed in duplicate. In addition, movable object special effects are referred to as movable object effects when the on-hold / active change effect for which enlarged display is performed and the movable object effect are performed in an overlapping manner. In the movable body special effect, the effect image is displayed on a small screen as a specific display area displayed on the image display device 5. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the movable body 99 is rotating, and to prevent the on-hold display and the active display from becoming unrecognizable.

  When the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game is "big hit", a finalized decorative figure to be a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, a big hit combination is decided by the same decorative pattern being aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right" The decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

  When the jackpot type is “non-deterministic change”, a definite decoration pattern to be a non-probability change big-hit combination may be derived. For example, the fixed decorative symbol to be the non-probable variation big hit combination has symbol number “1” which is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of “left”, “middle”, “right” in the image display device 5, for example. Among the decorative symbols of “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are “2”, “4”, “6” and “8” is “left”, “middle” and “right” The decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all displayed on the predetermined effective line and stop-displayed, and may be one type of finalized decorative symbol that is a big hit combination. A decorative symbol whose symbol number constituting the non-probable variation big hit combination is an even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” in this way is called non-probability variation symbol.

  When the jackpot type is "ceremony change", a finalized decorative symbol may be derived which is a non-probable variable jackpot combination, or a finalized decorative symbol which may be a probability variation big hit combination may be derived. For example, the fixed decorative symbols to be used in the probability variation big hit combination have symbol numbers “1” to “1” which are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of “left”, “middle” and “right” in the image display device 5 Among the decorative symbols of "8", any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are "1", "3", "5" and "7" is "left", "middle" and "right" It is displayed on the predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R and is stopped and displayed, and it is sufficient if it is one kind of a finalized decorative symbol that is a big hit combination. A decorative symbol whose symbol number constituting the probability variation big hit combination is an odd number “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” in this way is called a probability variation symbol.

  During the variable display of the decorative symbol that the finalized decorative symbol becomes the non-probable variation big hit combination or the positive variation big hit combination, the re-lottery effect may be executed. In the re-lottery effect, for example, after temporarily displaying a decorative pattern to be a non-probable variation big hit combination on the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the image display device 5, for example The left "," "middle", "right" decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R again in the state that the same decorative symbol is aligned, and decorative symbol (probable symbol) and non-deterministic big hit combination, Of the decorative symbols (non-probable variable symbols) to be the probability variation big hit combination, one is displayed as a finalized display symbol (final stop display) as a finalized decorative symbol. Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the jackpot type is "non-deterministic change", the decoration pattern that has been temporarily stopped is re-varied as the re-lottery effect, and then the fixed decoration that becomes the non-probable change big hit combination A re-lottery disappointing effect is performed in which the symbols are derived and displayed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the jackpot type is "certain change", the decoration pattern that has been temporarily stopped is re-varied as the re-lottery effect, and then the fixed decoration becomes the positive change big hit combination The re-lottery winning effect for stopping and displaying the symbol may be performed, or the re-lottery losing effect may be performed.

  When the jackpot type is "probable change", the decoration pattern which is non probability change big hit combination is displayed once during the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the re-lottery effect is executed during the variable display, and the subsequent big hit gaming state A jackpot promotion effect may be executed at the end of the middle or jackpot gaming state, and the start of control to be a positive change state may be notified. During the jackpot promotion state, during the start of the jackpot gaming state or during the round in the jackpot gaming state, in the jackpot gaming state, from the end of any round in the jackpot gaming state to the start of the next round In the period from the end of the last round to the start of the next variable display game, etc., a definite change notification of whether to control in a positive change state or not is performed. Note that the same notification effect as the jackpot promotion promotion may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state or the like. The jackpot promotion promotion that is executed after the final round in the jackpot gaming state may be referred to in particular as "ending promotion promotion". The start of control to be a probability change state may be notified without the re-lottery effect or the jackpot promotion effect being executed.

  When the special drawing display result is "loss", the decorative display forming the predetermined non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without the variable display mode of the decorative design being the reach mode, and the non-specific display result The finalized decorative design that is In addition, when the special figure display result becomes “losing”, after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the decorative pattern that constitutes a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as “reach losing combination”) is stopped and displayed As a result, a finalized decorative symbol that is a nonspecific display result may be derived and displayed.

  Next, main operations (actions) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described.

  In the main substrate 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing to be gaming control main processing. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initialization. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Further, the register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When initialization is complete, after enabling the interrupt, it enters loop processing. In the game control main process, the loop process may be entered after executing the process for restoring the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop.

  When the CPU 103 having executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disable state and executes predetermined game control timer interrupt processing. The game control timer interrupt process includes, for example, a switch process, a main side error process, an information output process, a game random number update process, a special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process, and a command control process. Includes processing to control the progress of the

  The switch process is a process of determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 through the switch circuit 110. The main side error processing is processing for diagnosing abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and enabling generation of a warning if necessary according to the result of the diagnosis. The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The game random number updating process is a process for updating at least a part of the plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by software.

  As an example, random numbers for special display display determination, a random number MR2 for determination of a big hit type, and a random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are used as random numbers for gaming used on the main substrate 11 side. It should be included (see FIG. 6). The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with a variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a "big hit". It can take any value of "65535". The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type as any of a plurality of types, such as "non-probability change" or "probability change", when the variable display result is set as "big hit". It is a random number value and can take any value of "1" to "100". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as any of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance, and “1” to “251 It can take one of the following values:

  In the special symbol process process included in the timer control process for game control, the value of the special view process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display in the special symbol display device 4 Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of operation and opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure. The normal symbol process processing controls the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 20, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the tilting operation setting of the movable wing in the normally variable winning ball device 6B, etc. Is a process that enables

  The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 or the like. As an example, in the special symbol process processing and the ordinary symbol process processing, the transmission setting of the control command (such as the effect control command) is set to the command transmission table (predetermined for each command in the ROM 101 according to the effect control command to be sent ) Is specified (for example, the value of the storage address is stored in a transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 102), etc., and provided in the RAM 102 in the command control process. Of the output ports included in I / O 105, corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer (for example, the value indicating the storage address etc. in ROM 101) Send the production control command After setting control data to the output port for setting the predetermined control data to the output port of the effect control INT signal and setting the effect control INT signal to the on state for a predetermined time and then turning it off, etc. It enables transmission of effect control commands (effect control commands set for transmission) based on settings in the transmission table. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.

  FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101.

  When the start winning determination process is started, the CPU 103 first determines the first start opening based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the switch 22A is on (step S201). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the number of first special drawing pending storages, which is the number of pending storages of the special drawing game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit It is determined whether or not (for example, "4") (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 reads the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102, thereby suspending the first special view. It is sufficient if the number of memories can be specified. When the first special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the starting opening which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102 The buffer value is set to "1" (step S203).

  When the first start port switch 22A is off at step S201 (step S201; No), or when the number of first special view storages has reached the upper limit at step S202 (step S202; Yes) Whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is on is determined based on a detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B ( Step S204). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step S204; Yes), the number of second special view pending storages, which is the number of pending storages of the special view game using the second special view, is a predetermined upper limit It is determined whether (for example, "4") is set (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 reads the second hold storage count value, which is a storage value of a second hold storage count counter provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102, to hold the second special view hold. It is sufficient if the number of memories can be specified. When it is determined in step S205 that the second special figure storage number is not the upper limit (step S205; No), the starting opening buffer value is set to "2" (step S206). If the second starting port switch 22B is not on (step S204; No), or if the number of second tomogram storage is the upper limit (step S205; Yes), the start winning determination process is ended.

  After one of the processes in steps S203 and S206 is executed, the pending storage count value corresponding to the starting opening buffer value is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the first pending storage number count value is incremented by one, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the second pending storage number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is increased by 1 (increment when the game ball enters the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special view game using the first special figure is satisfied). ) To be updated. Also, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1 (increment when the game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special view game using the second special figure is satisfied). ) To be updated. At this time, the total on-hold storage number count value, which is the storage value of the on-hold storage number counter provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102, is updated to add 1 (step S208).

  After executing the processing of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined gaming random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number circuit 104 or random value data updated by a random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102 Numerical data representing the numerical value MR1, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (see FIG. 6). Numeric data representing each random number value extracted in this manner is stored as hold data at the top of the empty entry in the special view hold storage unit according to the start port buffer value (step S210). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the hold data is set in the first special view hold storage unit as shown in FIG. 7 (A). On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the hold data is set in the second special view hold storage unit as shown in FIG. 7B.

  The first special figure reservation storage unit shown in FIG. 7A is not yet started although the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first start winning occurs. The reserve data of the special drawing game (the special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special view reserve storage unit is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detecting the game balls) to the first start winning opening, and based on the establishment of the first start condition by the entry of the game balls. The number of stored data is the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, and numerical data indicating the random pattern value MR3 for variation pattern determination Are stored until a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4") is reached. The reserve data thus stored in the first special view reserve storage unit indicates that execution (variable display) of the special view game using the first special view is suspended, and the variable display result in the special view game ( It is possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result), and whether the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, reach effect of super reach etc.) It becomes pending storage information.

  The second special figure reserve storage unit shown in FIG. 7 (B) is still started although the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second start winning occurs. Hold data of no special figure game (special figure game using second special figure in second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special view reserve storage unit is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the detection order of the game balls) to the second start winning opening, and based on the establishment of the second start condition by the entry of the game balls. The random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, the numerical data indicating the random pattern value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, etc. It stores until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserve data thus stored in the second special view reserve storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special view game using the second special view is suspended, and the variable display result in the special view game ( It is possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result), and whether the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, reach effect of super reach etc.) It becomes pending storage information.

  Subsequent to the process of step S210, the CPU 103 performs a start winning determination process (step S211). The start winning determination process is a process for so-called pre-reading. In this embodiment, when variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) by the special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 4, FIG. 9) described later. A determination is made as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the "big hit". Further, in a variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 4, FIG. 11) to be described later, determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed.

  On the other hand, separately from these decisions, the CPU 103 executes the winning determination process of step S211 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). , Determination of whether the special figure display result of the special figure game executed by the current start winning combination will be "big hit", the display mode with a variable display mode of the decorative symbol executed by the current start winning combination with a reach It is determined whether or not As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball entering the start winning opening is started, the special pattern display result becomes "big hit", or the variable display mode of the decorative symbol Predict the display mode with reach, etc., and change the color of the hold display by the effect control CPU 120 or the like on the side of the effect control board 12 based on the prediction result, the color of the hold change effect or the color of the active display It can be determined whether to perform an active change rendition that changes the.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process. The CPU 103 first confirms, for example, the state of a short time flag (a flag which is turned on in the short time state) or a positive change flag (a flag which is turned on in the definite state) which is provided in a predetermined area in the RAM 102, or the like. The present gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S401). The CPU 103 identifies the definite variation state when the definite variation flag is on, identifies the short time status when the short time flag is on, and the normal condition when both the probable variation flag and the short time flag are off. It should be specified.

  Subsequent to the process of step S401, the CPU 103 selects a table prepared corresponding to the current gaming state from among a plurality of special figure display result determination tables prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance. It selects and sets to a use table (step S402). A plurality of special view display result determination tables are prepared in accordance with whether the gaming state is a definite change state or the like. In the special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10A, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination designates the special figure display result as “big hit”. What is necessary is just to be assigned to the determination result of which one of "loss".

  For example, as a special figure display result determination table, a special figure display result determination table (see FIG. 10A) corresponding to the non-probability state and the probability state is prepared. The CPU 103 sets a table corresponding to the current gaming state from the ROM 101 to the RAM 102 by setting the table in the use table.

  After that, the CPU 103 determines whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special image display result extracted in step S209 of FIG. 5 is within the predetermined big hit determination range (step S403). In the jackpot determination range, individual decision values assigned to the special chart display result of "big hit" in the use table set in the process of step S402 are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random value MR1 with each decision value one by one. By doing this, it is only necessary to be able to determine the presence or absence of a decision value that matches the random value MR1. Alternatively, the CPU 103 sets the random number MR1 and the minimum value and the maximum value of the big hit determination range by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination values included in the big hit determination range. It is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random value MR1 is within the range of the big hit determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 is determined as "big hit" (big hit start determination) .

  If it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the jackpot determination range (step S403; No), the CPU 103 displays a display result specification command (determination at start winning) according to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A transmission setting is performed to transmit to the effect control board 12 a command specifying "losing" as a display result of the results (step S405).

  If it is determined in step S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 refers to the jackpot type determination table prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 or the like. In the jackpot type determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10 (B), the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination determines that the jackpot type is “non-probability variation” or “probability variation”. It may be assigned to the decision result of which one. The CPU 103 sets the jackpot type assigned to the decision value that matches the random value MR2 as the present determination result. The display control command according to the determination result in the process of step S409 (command for specifying "big hit" of "probable variation" or "non-probable variation" as the display result among the determination results at the start winning), A transmission setting for transmission is performed for 12 (step S410).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S405 and S410, the CPU 103 transmits, to the effect control board 12, a variation category command (a command specifying the variation category among the determination results at the start winning). Transmission setting is performed (step S413).

  After step S413, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the start winning combination designation command (step S414). The 1st start winning a prize mouth specified command here is the production control baseplate 12 as the production control information which notifies the increase of the 1st special figure reservation memory count, when the 1st starting condition is satisfied by the occurrence of the 1st start winning a prize Sent to the Further, the second start winning opening designation command is used as effect control information of effect control board 12 for notifying an increase in the second special view reservation storage number when the second start condition is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning. Sent to the side. After step S414, the winning determination process ends.

  Again, referring back to FIG. Thereafter, the CPU 103 determines whether the starting opening buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S212). At this time, if the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step S212; "2"), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S213), and the starting winning combination is made. The determination process ends. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is "1" (step S212; "1"), the starting port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S214), The process proceeds to step S204. As a result, even when both the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B simultaneously detect a starting winning combination of valid gaming balls, it is possible to surely complete the processing based on the detection of both starting starting winning combinations.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 executes steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102. Select and execute one of the following processing.

  The special symbol normal processing of step S110 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A or 4A is based on the presence or absence of the pending data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, such as the first special view pending storage unit or the second special view pending storage unit. A determination is made as to whether or not the special drawing game is to be started by the second special symbol display device 4B. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result, whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" is the variable display result Make a decision (pre-decision) before being displayed. At this time, when the variable display result is determined to be "big hit", the big hit type is determined to be any of a plurality of types such as "non-probability change" or "probability change". The data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, whereby the jackpot type is stored. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the finalized special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B Missing symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “1”.

  FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 4 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 103 first determines whether the number of second special view reservations is “0” (step S 231). The second special figure reservation storage count is the number of reserved storages of the special view game using the second special view by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 may read the second hold storage count value and determine whether the read value is “0”.

  When the number of second special figure holding storages is other than "0" at step S231 (step S231; No), for example, the top area of the second special drawing holding storage unit (for example, the storage area corresponding to holding number "1") The numerical value data indicating a predetermined random number value is read out as pending data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (step S232). Thereby, the game random number extracted corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (the second starting winning) at the second starting winning opening is read out in the process of step S209 shown in FIG. The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, the second special storage storage count is updated by subtracting one, for example, by subtracting the second storage storage count value by one, and the second special storage storage is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S233). For example, the pending data stored in the storage area (the storage area corresponding to the pending numbers "2" to "4") lower than the pending number "1" in the second special view pending storage unit is advanced by one entry each shift. Further, in the process of step S233, the total pending storage number (total pending storage number count value) is updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variation special feature designation buffer value, which is the storage value of the variation special feature designation buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, is updated to "2" (step S234).

  When the number of second special figure holding memories is "0" at step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether the number of first special drawing holding memories is "0" (step S235). The first special view reservation storage number is the number of suspension storages of the special view game using the first special view by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 may read the first pending storage count value and determine whether the read value is “0”. As described above, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the number of second special view reservations is “0”, and the number of first special views suspension storage is “0”. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the special view game using the second special view starts being executed with priority over the special view game using the first special view.

  In addition, regardless of whether it is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the first starting winning opening when the special figure game is executed in the order in which the game balls enter the starting winning opening. The starting opening data indicating which of the second starting winning opening and the game ball has entered is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in association with the holding data together with the holding data or separately from the holding data, The order in which the start conditions are satisfied may be specified for the special-figure games corresponding to the respective hold data.

  Subsequent to the process of step S 236, the first TOC pending memory number is updated by subtracting 1 by, for example, subtracting 1 from the 1st pending memory number count value, etc. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S237). For example, the pending data stored in the storage area (the storage area corresponding to the pending numbers “2” to “4”) lower than the pending number “1” in the first special view pending storage unit is advanced one entry at a time shift. Further, in the process of step S237, the total pending storage number (total pending storage number count value) is updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variation special feature designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is determined as either "big hit" or "losing" (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 is selected and set in the use table for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10A, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination designates the special figure display result as “big hit”. It may be allocated according to the presence or absence of the probability change control in the probability change state (whether or not the gaming state is the probability change state) to the determination result of which of the “loss” is to be made. The CPU 103 reads, from the variation random number buffer, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determination of the special view display result included in the game random number temporarily stored in the variation random number buffer in step S232 or S236, and the gaming state is in a definite state By referring to the special chart display result determination table set in the use table based on whether or not there is a numerical value data indicating the random number value MR1, the game state is irregular depending on whether or not it is a definite change state The determination result of either “big hit” or “losing” assigned to the determination value corresponding to the numerical value MR1 may be determined as the special view display result. The CPU 103 determines that the probability variation control is being performed when the probability variation flag (a flag that is turned on in the probability variation state) provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is on. do it. For example, when the random number value MR1 is "9000", the CPU 103 determines that the special figure display result is "big hit" when the probability change flag is on (when probability change control is present), and the probability change flag is When it is in the off state (when there is no probability change control), it is determined that the special figure display result is to be "lost".

  As shown in FIG. 10A, when the probability change control is performed in the probability change state, the special view display result is “at a higher rate than when the probability change control is not performed in the normal state or the short time state. It is determined to be a "big hit". Therefore, for example, based on the fact that the probability change flag is set to the on state corresponding to the case where the jackpot type is "probable" by the jackpot end processing of step S117 shown in FIG. 4 (details will be described later). When the current gaming state is a definite change state, the special view display result is more likely to be a "big hit" and more likely to be a big hit game state than when the definite change control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state.

  Thereafter, the CPU 103 determines whether the special map display result determined by the process of step S239 is a "big hit" (step S240). If the special view display result is determined to be "big hit" (step S240; Yes), the big hit flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step S241) .

  Also, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S 242). As an example, in the process of step S 242, a jackpot type determination table shown in the example prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 is selected and set in the use table for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, depending on the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, the decision result as to which of the plural types ("probable variation", "non-probability variation") It should be assigned to (see FIG. 10 (B)). The CPU 103 reads, from the variation random number buffer, numeric data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type included in the gaming random number temporarily stored in the random number buffer for variation at step S232 or S236, and determines the random number MR2 for determining the big hit category. The jackpot type assigned to the decision value corresponding to the random number MR2 may be selected by referring to the determination table of the jackpot type set in the use table based on the numerical data indicating. For example, when the random number MR2 is "75", the CPU 103 determines (selects) "probability" as the big hit type.

  After the process of step S242 is performed, the jackpot type is stored (step S243). In the big hit type buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, the CPU 103 sets a big hit type buffer setting value (for example, as shown in FIG. The jackpot type may be stored by storing “0” in the case of “probable change” and “1” in the case of “probable change”.

  If the special view display result is not a "big hit" in step S240 (step S240; No) or after executing the process of steps S241 to S243, a finalized special symbol which is a variable display result of the special symbol in the special view game Are determined (step S246). As an example, when it is determined that the special figure display result is not a "big hit" in steps S240 and S244, a special symbol predetermined as a lost symbol is determined as a finalized special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S240 that the special view display result is "big hit", a plurality of big hit types according to the big hit type determination result in step S242 (according to the big hit type buffer setting value) Any one of the special symbols predetermined as the symbols may be determined as the determined special symbol.

  After the process of step S246 is performed, the value of the special view process flag is updated to "1" (step S247), and the special symbol normal processing is ended. When the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "1" in step S247, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 4 is executed.

  If the number of reserved memories of the special drawing game using the first special drawing in step S235 is "0" (step S235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S248), the special symbol End normal processing. In this demonstration display setting, for example, a presentation control command (waiting customer demonstration designation command) for specifying a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5, etc. It is determined whether transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demonstration display setting is ended. In the effect control board 12, when the customer waiting demo specification command is transmitted, the demonstration screen is displayed.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 in FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special process process flag is “1”. The variation pattern setting process includes, for example, a process of determining the variation pattern as any one of a plurality of types based on a result of a prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is to be a "big hit". Since the variation pattern designates the content (variable display mode) of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the content of the variable display of the decorative symbol is determined by this determination. The variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is preset corresponding to the variation pattern. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern setting process, the variable display time from when the variable display of the special symbol is started to when the determined special symbol to be the variable display result is derived is determined. In addition, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is to be "reach" when the variable display result is "loss". Alternatively, even if it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is to be "reach" by determining the change pattern when the change display result is "loss" in the change pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. Good. Furthermore, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of performing setting for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "2."

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 4 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first determines whether the big hit flag is on (step S261). Then, if the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special view display result is "big hit" is determined (step S262).

  If the big hit flag is off in step S261, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the lost time when the special view display result is "loss" (step S265).

  FIG. 12 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result (special figure display result) is "loss", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non reach" not to be the reach mode and "reach mode" Corresponding to each case of "reach", and also corresponding to the case where the variable display result (special figure display result) is "big hit" and the big hit type becomes "non-probability change" or "probability change", etc. Fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance.

  In this embodiment, fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-3 for normal time (non-time-short time) and fluctuation for time-short time as fluctuation patterns specifying variable display result as "losing" and "non-reach" Patterns PB1-1 and PB1-2 are prepared.

  In addition, a variation pattern is prepared in which the contents correspond to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" (big hit type is "big hit" or "non-big change" big hit) and when it is "losing". Specifically, a fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (for losing) and a fluctuation pattern PA3-1 ("big hit") for designating execution of normal reach are prepared. Further, a variation pattern PA2-2 (for losing) and a variation pattern PA3-2 ("big hit") designating execution of the super reach A are prepared. Further, a variation pattern PA2-3 (for losing) and a variation pattern PA3-3 ("big hit") for designating execution of the super reach B are prepared. Also, a variation pattern PA2-4 (for losing) and a variation pattern PA3-4 ("big hit") are prepared to specify that Super Reach C should be executed and then developed into Super Reach A.

  In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 11, for example, a big hit variation pattern is determined using the big hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. As an example, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the numerical value (decision value) with which the jackpot type is compared with the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination in both cases of “non-probability change” and “probability change” is commonly It may be allocated to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern.

  The CPU 103 refers to the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table based on numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination read out from the fluctuation random number buffer, and the fluctuation assigned to the decision value corresponding to the random value MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the fluctuation pattern to be used this time. For example, when the random value MR3 is "140", the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern PA3-3.

  In the process of step S265 shown in FIG. 11, the lost fluctuation pattern prepared in advance corresponding to the normal state where the gaming state is the normal state and the case where the gaming state is the short state and the short time control is performed. The change pattern at the time of losing is determined using the determination table. For example, it is specified whether the time saving flag (the flag which is turned on in the time saving state) provided in the predetermined area (for example, the game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is in the on state or not If the time is not short (when the time short flag is in the off state), the change pattern at the time of loss is determined using the loss change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14 (A). On the other hand, when the time is short (when the time short flag is in the on state), the fluctuation pattern at the time of losing is determined using the lost fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14B.

  In each lost fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination may be allocated to the fluctuation pattern determination result according to the total number of pending storages. The total pending storage number may be specified from, for example, the total pending storage number count value which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter, the total value of the first pending storage number count value and the second pending storage number count value, etc. .

  The CPU 103 determines whether the time is short or not, the total reserve memory number count value, and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination read from the fluctuation random number buffer, and indicates normal time and time delay. By referring to any of the lost fluctuation pattern determination tables according to the total number of pending storages, when the time is not short, “0” to “1”, “2” to “4”, “5” to “8” The fluctuation pattern assigned to the decision value corresponding to the random value MR3 according to which of the following applies and which time it is during the time-saving, according to which of “0”, “1” and “2” to “8”. Is selected (selected) as the fluctuation pattern to be used this time.

  For example, when the time saving flag is on and the random number value MR3 is "229", the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern PA2-1 when the total pending storage count value is "0", and the total pending The variation pattern PB1-1 is selected when the storage number count value is “1”, and the variation pattern PB1-2 is selected when the total pending storage number count value is any of “3” to “8”.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S262 and S265 shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 sets a special figure fluctuation time which is a variable display time of the special symbol (step S266). Special figure fluctuation time that is the variable display time of the special symbol, from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the time it is derived derived display of the finalized special symbol that will be the variable display result It is. As shown in FIG. 12, the special figure fluctuation time is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived by setting the special drawing fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected in the processing of steps S262 and S265.

  Following the process of step S266, CPU 103 performs a special figure game using the first special figure in first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure in second special symbol display device 4B. In order to start one of the special drawing games in which the start condition is satisfied, the setting for starting the change of the special symbol is performed (step S 267). As an example, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed. When the CPU 103 starts variable display using the first special view, the CPU 103 controls the first hold indicator 25A to display a display capable of identifying the number of the first special view hold storage subtracted by one. It is also possible to cause the hold indicator 25A to perform (for example, to decrease the number of lighted LEDs by one). When the CPU 103 starts variable display using the second special view, the CPU 103 controls the second hold indicator 25B to display the second special view which can be used to specify the second special view hold storage number subtracted by one. For example, the number of lighted LEDs may be reduced by one on the hold indicator 25B.

  After execution of the process of step S267, transmission setting of a command at the start of variation of the special symbol is performed (step S268). For example, when the fluctuation special drawing designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 transmits a first symbol fluctuation start designation command, a fluctuation pattern command, a display result designation command to the effect control board 12 from the main board 11. Performs transmission settings to transmit pending storage count specification commands sequentially. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends a second symbol variation start designation command, a variation pattern command, a display result designation command, and the second command to the effect control board 12 from the main board 11. Performs transmission settings to transmit pending storage count specification commands sequentially. The set command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the above-mentioned command control process after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. The first symbol variation start specification command and the second symbol variation start specification command here are transmitted as hold notification information specifying which of the first special view hold storage number and the second special view hold storage number decreased. Be done.

  After executing the process of step S268, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "2" (step S269), and then the variation pattern setting process is ended. When the value of the special view process flag is updated to "2" in step S269, the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 4 is executed when the next timer interrupt occurs.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 in FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process of varying a special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, a process of measuring an elapsed time after the special symbol starts variation, and the like It is included. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special figure change time, the change of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the special symbol is The fixed special symbol (fixed special symbol set in step S110) which is the result of variable display of the symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display), and the special symbol is displayed stopped when it is stopped and displayed (derived and displayed) The transmission setting of the symbol determination designating command, which is an effect control command for notifying the game), is also performed, and the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “3”. The symbol determination designation command set for transmission is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 by, for example, executing the above-mentioned command control process after the special symbol process process is completed. By repeatedly executing step S112, variable display of the special symbol, derivation display of the determined special symbol, and the like are realized.

  The special symbol stopping process of step S113 in FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In the special symbol stop processing, processing to determine whether the big hit flag is in the ON state, and when the big hit flag is in the ON state, the time saving flag and the probability change flag are turned OFF, and the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting The count value of the time counter is set to “0” to count the remaining number of variable display to be executed during time reduction control provided in a section etc.), corresponding to the start of the big hit start production wait time (big hit gaming state It is a waiting time until execution of the presentation is started, and it is a predetermined time.), And the start of the jackpot designating the start of the jackpot gaming state based on that the special view display result is "big hit" A process of transmitting and setting a designated command (effect control command) and updating the special drawing process flag to "4" is included. Further, the special symbol stop process includes a process of updating the value of the special process process flag to "0" when the big hit flag is not in the on state.

  The command set for transmission is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the above-mentioned command control process after the special symbol process process is completed, for example.

  By these series of processing, when a big hit, the time saving state or the probability changing state ends once, and when losing, the remaining variable display that can be performed during the time saving is reduced by one. When the remaining variable display that can be performed during time saving becomes “0” times, the time saving flag is turned off, and the time saving state ends. That is, the time saving state (time saving control) is ended when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (the initial count value described below) which is determined in advance before the variable display result becomes "big hit" from the start. In addition, when there is a change in the gaming state, notification of the gaming state after the change is made to the effect control board 12 side.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 of FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes that the variable display result is "big hit" and that the round game start timing has come (for example, the big hit start presentation waiting time set in the above has elapsed). Based on etc., the process of starting the execution of the round game in the big hit gaming state and opening the big winning opening, the process of starting the measurement of the elapsed time from the opening state, and the like are included. In this process, for example, the big winning opening is opened corresponding to whether the big hit type is “non-probable variation” or “probable variation” (can be specified by the big-hit type buffer setting value stored in the big-hit type buffer) The upper limit of the period to be set may be set. As an example, in response to the jackpot type "non-probability" or "probability", by setting the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened to "29 seconds", a normal release round is performed do it. When the process of opening the special winning opening is performed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "5". By repeatedly performing step S114, standby until the start timing of the round game, opening of the big winning opening, and the like are realized.

  The big hit open processing of step S115 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. Processing to determine whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state (or may be partially open), or the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state A process of returning the special winning opening to a closed state when it is determined that the number has reached a predetermined number (for example, nine) or when the elapsed time reaches the upper limit period set in step S114. And the process of starting measurement of the elapsed time after returning to the closed state. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "6". By repeatedly performing step S115, the opening state of the special winning opening is maintained until the timing of returning the special winning opening from the opening state to the closing state.

  The big hit opening post process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "6". In this big hit opening post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of times of execution of the round game with the big winning opening opened has reached a predetermined upper limit, or when the upper limit is not reached It includes a process of measuring the elapsed time after returning to the closed state. Then, when the next round game is started, for example, when the measured elapsed time becomes the time when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4” (in this case) Is a control command to notify that the big hit gaming state has ended, for example, when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number of times, the big winning opening is immediately opened in the process of step S114. A setting is made to send a big hit end designation command, and the value of the special view process flag is updated to “7”. The command set for transmission is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the above-mentioned command control process after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. By repeatedly performing step S116, the process waits until the special winning opening is again opened.

  By repeatedly performing steps S114 to S116, a big hit gaming state is realized.

  The big hit end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "7". In this big hit opening post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of times of execution of the round game with the big winning opening opened has reached a predetermined upper limit, or when the upper limit is not reached It includes a process of measuring the elapsed time after returning to the closed state. Then, when the next round game is started, for example, when the measured elapsed time becomes the time when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4” (in this case) Is a control command to notify that the big hit gaming state has ended, for example, when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number of times, the big winning opening is immediately opened in the process of step S114. A setting is made to send a big hit end designation command, and the value of the special view process flag is updated to “7”. The command set for transmission is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the above-mentioned command control process after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. By repeatedly performing step S116, the process waits until the special winning opening is again opened.

  It should be noted that the time saving state (time saving control) is ended only by the next big hit gaming state being started, of the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit gaming state being started. You may In this case, the setting of the initial count value and the time saving counter itself are unnecessary.

  Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute a predetermined effect control main process. When the effect control main process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and set CTC (counter / timer mounted on the effect control board 12) Perform register setting etc. of the circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122 is on. The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 occurs separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but interrupts using the CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue a prohibited instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal to be an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on, the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be in the off state, and command analysis processing is executed. In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main substrate 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process process is executed. In the effect control process, various effects such as display operation of effect images in the display area of the image display device 5, sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting operation of the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LED The control content of the rendering operation using the device is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the rendering control command or the like transmitted from the main substrate 11. Subsequent to the effect control process, the effect random number updating process is executed, and software is used to update numerical data indicating effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the RAM 122 as various random number values used for effect control.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 15, first, the effect control CPU 120 executes pre-reading processing for setting execution of pre-reading effect such as hold / active change effect or movable object effect (step S160).

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the pre-reading process performed in step S160 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 16, first, the effect control CPU 120 sends a start winning opening designation command (a first start winning opening designation command and a second start winning opening) to be transmitted in the start winning determination process of FIG. It is determined whether or not any of the designation commands), the display result designation command (any of the display result 1 designation command, the display result 2 designation command, and the display result 3 designation command) and the fluctuation category command have been input ( Step S600). The effect control CPU 120 can recognize the start winning by the start winning opening designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether the determination result at the time of winning corresponding to the start winning is a big hit or a loss by the display result designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize the fluctuation pattern (such as whether or not it is a super reach) of the variable display corresponding to the start winning by the fluctuation category command. Note that these commands may be stored in the start winning reception command buffer provided in the RAM 122.

  If the start winning combination designating command, the display result designating command, and the variation category command have not been input (step S600; No), the pre-reading process is ended. On the other hand, when the start winning opening designating command, the display result designating command, and the variation category command are input (step S600; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the pending storage number count value indicating the special view pending storage number to 1 Increment (step S601). The pending storage count value is provided, for example, in the RAM 122. The pending storage number count value is incremented by 1 each time the first start winning opening designation command or the second starting winning opening designation command is input, and the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command is input. Decrease by one each time As a result, the pending storage count value indicates the current number of special map pending storages.

  After incrementing the hold storage count value by 1 (step S601), the CPU for effect control 120 performs pre-reading effect execution setting processing for setting execution of pre-reading effect such as hold / active change effect or movable object effect (step S602).

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the pre-reading effect execution setting process executed in step S602 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, first, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute pre-reading effect such as hold / active change effect and movable object effect (step S700). Specifically, in the process of step S700, the pre-reading effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 18 is referred to, and the presence or absence of pre-reading effect is determined. In addition, when the command at the time of starting winning a prize is missed or inconsistency occurs, the restriction on pre-reading effect is not performed until the variable display of the hold information corresponding to those commands is executed (digested) Be done. In addition, when the execution of the pre-reading effect is limited, the pre-reading effect of all aspects may not be performed for the pre-reading effect for the variable display corresponding to the start winning combination generated within the predetermined period, The pre-reading effect of some aspects may not be performed. Further, in this embodiment, when the pre-reading effect is already being executed, the process of executing the pre-reading effect on the other object is restricted until the variable display to be the advance notice ends. . Furthermore, during time saving control, it may be limited so that processing to execute pre-reading effect is not performed (pre-reading effect may be executed only in the normal state where time reducing control is not performed), During control, the pre-reading effect is executed based on the second start winning opening designating command (restricts the pre-reading effect for the winning to the first starting winning opening), and the first start in the case of a normal state where time saving control is not performed. The pre-reading effect may be executed based on the winning opening designating command (the pre-reading effect for the winning on the second start winning opening may be restricted). Further, for example, the execution of the pre-reading effect may be limited according to the number of pending storages, such as enabling the pre-reading effect to be executable only when the number of pending storages is two or more. In addition, when the pre-reading effect is executed when the number of pending storages is 1, a change in which the pending display of the notice object can be recognized (change to the special display mode displayed only when the pending / active change effect is performed) Each change such as the change of the display mode of the active display is performed for the player in an instant. Therefore, when the pre-reading effect is performed when the number of pending storages is 1, it may be performed only when the display mode with the highest degree of expectation is obtained, such as when the final color is "red". According to this, the player's attention can be drawn to the hold display and the active display.

  Also, the previous variation category command stored in the start winning reception command command buffer is checked to determine whether or not it is a variation category that can be executed with pre-reading effects, and it is determined that it is an execution category that can be executed. The pre-reading effect may be executable only when it is performed (if it is impossible, the pre-reading effect may be limited). For example, all variation categories specified by the variation category command received up to one before the latest variation category command and stored in the start-up winning time reception command buffer are read, and all the readings are “non-reach” In the case of designating a variation category corresponding to the variable display mode, it may be determined that the pre-reading effect is an executable variation category. According to this, in each variable display until variable display which is an object of advance is started, the pre-reading effect can be executed when all become the non-reach variable display mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reach effect from being executed in the middle of the pre-reading effect and the continuity of the pre-reading effect being impaired.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the pre-reading effect execution determination table. In the pre-read effect execution decision table shown in FIG. 18, when both hold / active change effect and movable object effect are executed, when only hold / active change effect is executed and movable object effect is not executed, hold / active change effect and In the case of executing only the movable body effect without executing the movable body effect (when the above executes the prefetch effect), in the case where neither the hold / active change effect nor the movable body effect is executed (when the prefetch effect is not performed) On the other hand, different determination rates are set depending on whether the winning determination result indicated by the display result designation command determined to be input in step S600 in FIG. 16 is a big hit or a loss. As illustrated, the execution ratio of the pre-reading effect differs according to the corresponding hold-time determination result of winning, and in the case of the big hit, the pre-reading effect is executed at a higher ratio than in the case of the loss. Further, even in the case where the pre-reading effect is executed, in the case of the big hit, the ratio in which both the hold / active change effect and the movable object effect are executed is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation that both the hold / active change presentation and the movable body presentation are performed. The pre-reading effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 18 is stored in, for example, the RAM 122. The effect control CPU 120 executes both the pending / active change effect and the movable object effect based on the pre-read effect execution determination table and the winning time determination result indicated by the display result designation command determined to be input in step S600. Whether or not to execute the movable body effect by executing only the suspension / active change effect, or to execute only the movable body effect without executing the suspension / active change effect and the movable body effect, or the suspension / active change effect and the movable body effect Decide if you do not want to do both. That is, in the process of step S700 of FIG. 17, when performing pre-reading effect with the presence or absence of pre-reading effect, whether to perform holding / active change effect, moving object effect or both, The kind of pre-reading effect is also decided at a stretch. It should be noted that, separately from this, it is determined in two stages that the type of pre-reading effect to be executed is further decided, if the pre-reading effect is determined to be performed first and then the pre-reading effect is determined to be performed. You may

  Returning to FIG. 17, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the determination in step S700 has decided to execute the hold / active change effect (step S701). If it is determined that the suspension / active change effect is not to be executed (step S701; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the pre-reading effect execution setting process.

  When it is determined to execute the hold / active change effect (step S 701; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 refers to the final color determination table shown in FIG. 19 and finally changes the color (final color) Are determined (step S706). As described above, in this embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, in the hold change effect, the advance notice object is made recognizable to the player (changed to the special display mode), and only in the active change effect. Although an example in which the display color changes is shown, for example, the display color may be changed stepwise in the hold change effect. Specifically, a plurality of hold / active change effect patterns may be prepared, and the display color may be changed each time the hold display is shifted. The pending / active change effect pattern has, for example, a third pending position (pending 3) indicating the number of pendings corresponding to the start winning from the oldest pending according to the number of pending storages (Hold 2), the mode of change in color and color of the hold display when it becomes the first (hold 1), and the active display when the variable display corresponding to the start winning becomes active (when active) It is only necessary to show the color and the aspect of the color change. In the process of step S706, the final display color including the case of stepwise change may be determined.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the final color determination table. In the final color determination table, final colors of “white”, “blue”, “green”, and “red” are set to be determined at different rates according to the variable display result. In the final color determination table in this embodiment, the ratio of the big hit when the final color is "red" is the highest, followed by "green", and then "blue" and "white" are the most successful. Rate is set low. In addition, in the case of "green" and "red", the determination ratio is set such that at least super reach is determined. As described above, in the case of the hold / active change effect in which the display color changes to green or red, since all the hold display and the active display being displayed may be enlarged, the enlarged display may be performed. In the variable display corresponding to the pending display to be the advance notice target, at least the notification of becoming the super reach is notified. Therefore, the player's expectation for the enlarged display can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 17, after executing the process of step S706, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the final color determined in the process of step S706 is "green" or "red" (step S707). . If the final color is neither "green" nor "red", that is, "white" or "blue" (step S707; No), the CPU 120 for effect control controls all of the display including the hold display of the notice target. The enlargement mode setting for enlarging and displaying the hold display and the active display is determined as none (step S 708). As a result, in the on-hold / active change effect changing to “white” or “blue”, the enlarged display is not performed, and the small screen as the specific display area is not displayed in the image display device 5. After executing the process of step S 708, the CPU for effect control 120 ends the pre-reading effect execution setting process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S 707 that the final color is “green” or “red” (step S 707), the effect control CPU 120 displays all the pending displays in the display including the pending display of the notice target. And the enlargement mode setting presence or absence which expands and displays an active display is determined with reference to the enlargement mode setting presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 20 (step S709).

  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the enlargement mode setting presence / absence determination table. In the enlargement mode setting presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 20, the display result designation command determined in step S600 in FIG. 16 is for the enlargement mode setting with enlargement and without the enlargement mode setting without enlargement. Different determination rates are set depending on whether the winning determination result shown is a big hit or a loss. As shown in the figure, the proportion determined to be with the enlargement mode setting to perform the enlargement display differs according to the corresponding hold winning time determination result, and in the case of the big hit, it is determined to be the enlargement mode setting than in the case of losing The proportion is high. Therefore, the player's expectation for the enlarged display can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 17, after executing the process of step S709, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the enlargement mode setting is determined in step S709 (step S710). If it is determined that the enlargement mode is not set (Step S710; No), the CPU for effect control 120 ends the pre-reading effect execution setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the enlargement mode is set (step S710; Yes), the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the movable object effect is determined in step S700, that is, hold / active change effect and movable It is determined whether it has been decided to perform both body effects (step S711). When the movable object effect is not performed, that is, when only the hold / active change effect is performed (step S711; No), the effect control CPU 120 turns on the enlargement flag indicating that only the hold / active change effect is performed to perform the enlarged display. (Step S712). The enlargement flag may be provided in the RAM 122. After executing the process of step S712, the effect control CPU 120 ends the pre-reading effect execution setting process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable object effect is to be performed, that is, when both the suspension / active change effect for performing the enlarged display and the movable object effect are performed (step S711; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the suspension for performing the enlarged display. An active change effect is executed, and further, a movable body effect is performed, that is, an overlapping flag indicating that the movable object effect to be executed is the above-described movable object special effect is set in the on state (step S713). The duplication flag may be provided in the RAM 122. After executing the process of step S 713, the CPU for effect control 120 ends the pre-reading effect execution setting process. Note that setting the overlap flag in the on state, that is, performing both the hold / active change presentation for performing enlarged display and the movable object presentation is also referred to as the specific condition being satisfied.

  Returning to FIG. 16, after executing the process of step S602, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of adding a hold display or an active display (step S603). For example, when the number of pending storages is 1 and the condition for starting the special figure game is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to add an active display to the active display area 5HA, and in the other cases, The effect control CPU 120 performs control to add a hold display according to the hold order to the start winning storage display area 5H. As described above, the condition for starting the special figure game is the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure and the first starting condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure. There are 2 start conditions. For example, in the case where the special display game or the big hit game state of the previous time is ended and the variable display is not executed on the image display device 5 and the demonstration image etc. are displayed, the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied. It becomes a state.

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines the content (displayed in gray as an initial state) of the hold display and the active display that the image display device 5 should display, and displays the content to the display control unit 123 according to the determination. Output control command. The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, generates image data, and the active display area 5HA The active display is displayed on the screen, and the hold display is displayed on the start winning storage display area 5H. After executing the process of step S603, the effect control CPU 120 ends the pre-reading process.

  Again referring back to FIG. After the prefetching process in step S160, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the value (initially "0") of the effect process flag provided in the predetermined area (for example, effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122. One of the processes in steps S170 to S177 is selected and executed.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0". This variable display start waiting process is based on whether or not the first symbol design variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command has been received from the main substrate 11, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is performed. It includes a process of determining whether to start or not. When it is determined that the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command is received and it is determined that variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "1". Be done.

  The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process is a decorative symbol on image display device 5 in response to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special drawing game by first special symbol display device 4A or second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform the variable display of, the pre-reading effect set in the process of step S 602 in FIG. 16, and various other effect operations, the finalized decorative pattern or various types according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, etc. It includes the process of determining the effect control pattern. The variable display start setting process ends with the value of the effect process flag updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process of step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control determined in step S 171 corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (for example, effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 122 Various control data are read out from the pattern, and various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern.

  The process for waiting for a special figure in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3." In the special-image-per-wait process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received. Then, when the hit start designation command is received, the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, and the big hit type specified by the display result designation command received before that is "probable". Alternatively, if "non-deterministic", the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "4". Further, when the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command (when the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed), it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "missing" Then, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value.

  The special winning opening process at step S174 is normally performed when the value of the effect process flag is "4." In this large winning opening normal opening process, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit gaming state of “probable change” or “non-probable change”, and the effect image based on the set contents Are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 or output of voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by the output of commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13; Various effect control (big hit) occurred in big hit gaming state of "probable change" or "non-probable change", such as turning on / off / flashing game effect lamp 9 and decoration LED by the output of decoration signal), for example , And effect control to be notified in the image display device 5). In the special winning opening normal opening process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to “5” corresponding to the ending effect process in response to the reception of the big hit end designation command from the main substrate 11. Update.

  The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the setting content in the display area of the image display device 5 or Output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and output a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 14 for the game effect lamp 9 or decoration Various effect control at the end of the big hit gaming state such as turning on / off / flashing the LED is executed. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is an initial value.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of FIG. 15 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 21, the effect control CPU 120 first determines, based on, for example, the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11, whether the special view display result is "loss" or not. It determines (step S521). When it is determined that the special figure display result is "loss" (step S521; Yes), for example, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main substrate 11 changes the display pattern of the decorative symbol It is determined whether it is the non-reach fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case of "non-reach" which is not considered as the reach mode (step S522).

  If it is determined in step S522 that the non-reach variation pattern is determined (step S522; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of finalized design symbols that will be the final stop design that constitutes the non-reach combination ( Step S523). As an example, in the process of step S523, first, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the left determined symbol updated by the random counter for effect provided in a predetermined area (for example, effect control counter setting unit) of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122 The numerical data indicating the random number value for the character is extracted, and by referring to the left fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, etc., “left” in the display area of the image display device 5 in the fixed decoration symbol The left determined decorative symbol to be displayed stopped in the decorative symbol display area 5L is determined. Next, the numerical data indicating the right determined symbol determination random number value updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter or the like is extracted, and the right determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in the ROM 121 is referred to Thus, the finalized decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the finalized decorative symbols is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical value data indicating a random value for determining the middle fixed symbol determined to be updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to Thus, the finalized decorative symbol to be displayed in the stop display on the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 in the finalized decorative symbol is determined.

  If it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is not the non-reach variation pattern (step S522; No), the combination of the finalized design symbols to be the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating the random value for determining the left and right fixed symbol determined updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the left and right stored in advance in the ROM 121 By referring to the finalized symbol determination table or the like, symbol numbers of the finalized symbol in the display area of the image display device 5 in the left and the right represent the symbol numbers displayed on the left and the right in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R. Determine the same decorative pattern. Furthermore, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the middle fixed symbol determined to be updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to Thus, the finalized decorative symbol to be displayed stopped in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "middle" in the display area of the image display device 5 in the finalized decorative symbol is determined. Here, for example, when the determined decoration pattern becomes a big hit combination, as in the case where the symbol number of the middle determined decoration symbol becomes identical to the symbol number of the left determined decoration symbol and the right determined decoration symbol, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting (for example, “1”) to the symbol number of the middle fixed decoration symbol, etc., the fixed decoration symbol may be a reach combination without being a big hit combination. Alternatively, when the middle fixed decoration pattern is determined, the difference between the left fixed decoration pattern and the right fixed decoration pattern with the pattern number (pattern difference) may be determined, and the middle fixed decoration pattern corresponding to the design difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S521 that the special view display result is not "losing" (step S521; No), the CPU for effect control 120 determines the combination of the finalized decorative symbol that will be the final stop symbol constituting the big hit combination. (Step S527). As an example, in the process of step S527, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for jackpot determination symbol determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter or the like is extracted. Subsequently, the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5 L in the display region of the image display device 5 are referred to by referring to the big hit finalized symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121. 5C and 5R are fixed and the symbol numbers displayed stopped are determined the same decorative pattern. At this time, for example, the same decorative pattern is determined according to the jackpot type specified by the display result specification command or the like.

  The information of the mode and stop order of the left fixed decoration pattern, the right fixed decoration pattern, and the middle fixed decoration pattern set in steps S523, S524, and S527 is stored, for example, in the RAM 122.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S523, S524, and S527, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the overlap flag is set to the on state (step S528). As described above, the overlap flag is a flag indicating that the suspension / active change effect for performing enlarged display is performed and the movable object effect is further performed, and is set to the on state in the process of step S 712 in FIG. . When it is determined that the overlap flag is set to the on state (step S528; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect on the small screen as the specific display area displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable object effect. A movable body special effect setting process is performed to perform setting for executing a movable body special effect displaying an image (step S529). Specifically, in the process of step S529, the movable body 99 is caused to rotate for 2 seconds from the start of each variable display in a plurality of variable displays until the variable display of the hold of the advance notice is performed. In addition, a setting is made to display the effect image on a small screen as a specific display area. After executing the process of step S529, the effect control CPU 120 performs a hold / active change effect execution setting process for setting for executing the hold / active change effect (step S530). In the process of step S530, the setting is made to expand and display all the pending display and the active display being displayed including the pending display of the advance notice target, and the operation effect is performed at the timing when the pending display to be made advance notice shifts first. Furthermore, at the timing shifted to the active display area 5HA, setting is performed to change the display color of the active display by performing an operation effect. Further, in the process of step S530, a small screen as a specific display area is displayed on the image display device 5, and an image displayed in the hold / active change presentation (for example, hold display or active display, character image in action presentation, etc.) In addition to the setting for performing all the displays other than the small screen in the small screen, the display on the small screen as the specific display area is ended after the end of the hold / active change effect, and the setting for returning to the original state is performed. The process of step S529 may be performed after the process of step S530.

  When it is determined in step S528 that the overlap flag is in the off state (step S528; No), the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not to execute the movable object effect (step S531). When the movable body effect is to be executed (step S531; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs movable body effect setting processing for executing the movable body effect (step S532). Specifically, in the process of step S532, the movable body 99 is caused to rotate for 2 seconds from the start of each variable display in a plurality of variable displays until the variable display of the hold of the advance notice is performed. At the same time, a setting for displaying an effect image in the vicinity of the movable body 99 in the image display device 5 is performed.

  After executing the process of step S532, or when it is determined that the movable object effect is not performed in step S531 (step S531; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suspension / active change effect. (Step S533). If it is determined that the hold / active change effect is to be executed (step S533; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the hold / active change effect execution for executing the hold / active change effect according to the setting status of the enlargement flag. A process is performed (step S534). As described above, the enlargement flag is set to the on state in step S712 in FIG. In the process of step S534, when the enlargement flag is set to the on state, the setting for enlarging all the displayed pending and active displays including the pending display of the notice target is performed, and the notice becomes a notice target. The effect presentation is performed at the timing when the hold display is shifted first, and the display color of the active display is changed at the timing when the shift is made to the active display area 5HA. On the other hand, in the case where the enlargement flag is not set to the on state and is in the off state, the setting and the effect presentation for enlarging all the suspension display and the active display in display including the suspension display of the notice target are not performed. The display mode is changed so that the notice object can be recognized at the timing when the hold indication to be the notice object is first shifted, and the display color of the active indication is changed at the timing when shifted to the active display area 5HA. Set only the setting to be changed).

  After executing the process of step S530 or step S534, or when it is determined in step S533 that the suspension / active change effect is not to be executed (step S533; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes the other effect. The effect pattern setting process is performed (step S535).

  Subsequently, based on the content set in the process of steps S528 to S534 and the effect pattern set in the process of step S529, the effect control CPU 120 produces a production control pattern to be a usage pattern to be used later, It selects from among a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S536).

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an initial value of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as the effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 122 corresponding to the change pattern designated by the change pattern command. (Step S537).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for starting the change of the decorative symbol or the like in the image display device 5 (step S538). At this time, for example, the display control instruction specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the usage pattern in step S536 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123 or the like, and the like. It is sufficient to start the variation of the decorative symbol in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided in the display region of the above.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for updating the hold display in the start winning storage display area 5H and the active display in the active display area 5HA in response to the variable display being started (step S539). Here, when the hold display is displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H, the effect control CPU 120 erases the hold display corresponding to the hold order 1 and moves the remaining hold displays one by one (shift ). On the other hand, when the hold display is not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H and only the active display in the active display area 5HA is displayed, the effect control CPU 120 does not update the display.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2” which is a value corresponding to the variable display effect process (step S540), and ends the variable display start setting process.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of FIG. 15 as the variable-display effect process. In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, the effect control process timer value (step S801). ). As an example, in the process of step S 541, when the effect control process timer value is updated (for example, 1 subtracted) and the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, etc. It may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

  When the variable display time has not elapsed in step S541 (step S801; No), the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not it is a movable body effect execution period for executing the movable body effect ( Step S802). The movable body effect execution period is set in step S529 or step S532 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the movable object effect execution period is in progress (step S802; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the overlap flag is set to the on state (step S803). When the overlap flag is set to the on state (step S 803; Yes), the movable body 99 is rotationally operated, and the movable body special effect is to display the effect image on the small screen as the specific display area in accordance with the rotational operation. Control is performed (step S805). On the other hand, when the overlap flag is off (step S 803; No), the movable body 99 is rotationally operated, and a movable body effect control is performed to display an effect image in the vicinity of the movable body 99 in the image display device 5 according to the rotational operation. (Step S804).

  After performing the processing of step S805 or step S804, or when it is determined in step S802 that it is not the movable object effect execution period (step S803; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes hold / active change effect It is determined whether or not it is a holding / active change presentation execution period of (step S806). The suspension / active change presentation execution period is set in step S530 or step S534 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the hold / active change effect execution period is in progress (step S806; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold / active change effect according to the contents set in step S530 or step S534 of FIG. (Step S807). Specifically, in the process of step S 807, when the enlargement mode setting for performing the enlargement display is performed, the enlargement control for enlarging and displaying all the suspension display and the active display in display including the suspension display of the notice target is performed. While performing, it displays the character for performing the operation effect, controls to change the display mode of the hold display and the active display, and performs display other than the display regarding the hold / active change effect in the small screen as the specific display area Control is performed. Specifically, in the small screen as the specific display area, all displays other than the display related to the hold / active change effect such as background image and variable display, and notice effects other than the hold / active change effect are performed. On the other hand, when the enlargement mode setting for performing the enlargement display is not performed, the enlargement control is not performed, and the control for changing the display mode of the hold display and the active display is performed without executing the operation effect.

  After executing the processing of step S 807, or when it is determined in step S 806 that the suspension / active change presentation execution period is not in progress (step S 806; No), the CPU 120 for production control sets the overlapping flag or the enlargement flag in the on state. It is determined whether it is set (step S808). If it is determined that the overlap flag or the enlargement flag is set to the on state (S 808; Yes), it is determined whether the hold / active change presentation execution period has ended (step S 809). If the hold / active change effect execution period has ended (step S809; Yes), the display control by the small screen as the special area, that is, the specific display area control is ended, and the display is returned to the original state (step S810). After executing the process of step S810, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag set in the on state in the overlap flag or the enlargement flag to the off state (step S811).

  After executing the processing of step S811, if it is determined in step S808 that both the overlap flag and the expansion flag are off (step S808; No), or the suspension / active change effect execution period has not ended in step S809 When it determines with (step S809; No), CPU120 for production control decides whether or not it is the reach production execution period in order to execute reach production (step S812). The reach effect execution period may be determined in advance in the effect control pattern selected corresponding to the predetermined reach effect. If it is determined in step S812 that the reach effect execution period is reached (step S812; Yes), effect operation control for executing the reach effect is performed (step S813).

  When the reach effect execution period is not reached in step S812 (step S812; No), or after the process of step S813 is performed, for example, based on the setting in the special figure fluctuation effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, etc. After the effect operation control including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern is performed (step S 814), the variable display effect process is ended. When the small screen as the specific display area is displayed, the effect performed in step S814 is performed on the small screen. Whether the small screen display is being performed may be determined, for example, by referring to the state of the small screen display flag provided in the RAM 122. The small screen display flag may be set to the on state when the small screen display is performed in the process of step S 807, and may be cleared to the off state in the process of step S 810.

  If the variable display time has elapsed in step S801 (step S801; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step S815). At this time, if the symbol determination command is not received (step S815; No), the variable display effect processing is ended and the process waits. In addition, after the variable display time elapses, when the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol determination command, a predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol determination command normally. You may

  When the symbol determination command is received in step S815 (step S815; Yes), for example, in the variable display of the decorative symbol such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123 or the like. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (decided decorative symbol) to be the display result (step S816). Subsequently, a predetermined time determined in advance as a hit start designation command reception waiting time is set (step S 817), and the value of the rendering process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to waiting processing Step S818), the variable display effect processing ends.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 23 and FIG. 25, effects in the case where the hold / active change effect for performing the enlarged display and the movable object effect (the movable object effect executed here becomes the movable object special effect) are performed. The operation will be described. FIG. 23 is a timing chart when hold / active change effect and movable body effect are performed (more specifically, timing when hold / active change effect for performing enlarged display and movable body special effect is performed). Is a chart). FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of the rendering operation of the suspension / active change production and the movable body effect (more specifically, the rendering operation in the case of performing the suspension / active change rendering for performing the enlarged display and the movable body special performance An example is shown). In the example shown in the figure, the third variable display is a variable display of a preview target effect preview object, the variable display target notice object is referred to as target change, and the preview target target hold display is referred to as target hold.

  First, when the first variable display is started (transition from FIG. 25 (A) to FIG. 25 (B)), the hold / active change effect is executed, and all the hold display and active display being displayed are enlarged. (The hold display of the start winning storage display area 5H shown in FIG. 25A and the active display of the active display area 5HA are displayed on the hold display of the start winning storage display area 5H shown in FIG. 25B. Is displayed on the active display of). In addition, it may be made to change into a star shape (special mode) in connection with background switching without performing effect presentation. Moreover, you may change the display mode of a pending | holding display by performing the effect presentation of a different aspect by the case shown to FIG. 25 (B) and FIG. 25 (F). The example shown in the drawing shows an example in which the entire active display area 5HA (both the active display AH and the pedestal display AHA) is enlarged. Further, the display mode of the hold display of the notice target is changed into a star (special mode) so that the player can recognize which hold display is the hold display of the notice target (see FIG. 25B). Indication Pending HG). At the same time, a small screen as a specific display area is displayed (small screen 6DP shown in FIG. 25B). At the same time, as the movable body effect, the movable body 99 is rotationally operated for 2 seconds from the start of variable display, and the movable body special effect in which the effect image (effect image 44 shown in FIG. 25B) is displayed on the small screen Is executed (FIG. 25 (B)). In addition, the background image and the decorative design are reduced and displayed on the small screen (the background image 66 shown in FIG. 25A or the background image 66 where the decorative designs 5L, 5C, and 5R show in FIG. 25B, the decorative design It is displayed in reduced size as 5L, 5C, 5R). In addition, as shown in the figure, once the hold / active change effect for performing the enlarged display is executed, the small screen as the specific display area should continue to be displayed at least for a period until the hold / active change effect is finished. It becomes.

  When the first variable display is ended (FIG. 25C) and the second variable display is started, the movable body 99 is rotated for 2 seconds from the start of the variable display, and the movable body special effect is displayed. It is executed (FIG. 25D). When the target change is started, the movable body 99 is rotated for 2 seconds from the start of the target change, the special effect of the movable body is executed, and the action effect is performed on the active display (FIG. F)). Subsequently, when the movable object special effect ends, the display color of the active display changes to the final color determined in step S706 of FIG. 17 as a result of the action effect (active display of special mode shown in FIG. 25F) The 5HG aspect changes to the active indication 5HK aspect). In the illustrated example, an example in which the color has changed to red is shown (FIG. 25G). When the hold / active change effect is finished, the enlarged display is finished according to the end (The hold display of the start winning memory display area 5H and the active display of the active display area 5HA as shown in FIG. 25 (H) Is also displayed in its original size). Thereafter, the specific display area is not displayed and the control by the small screen is ended, and the original display (the decorative symbols 5L, 5C, 5R are also displayed in the original size, and the background image 66 is also displayed in the original size) (FIG. 25 (H)). Then, a rendering operation such as reach production is performed. As shown in FIG. 23, the on-hold / active change effect in this embodiment ends after the movable object effect (in this case, the movable object special effect) is ended. Further, the small screen as the specific display area is erased after the end of the hold / active change presentation. Therefore, the end timing of the effect becomes clear, and the effect can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to reduce (prevent) discomfort caused by ending when the movable body effect is halfway. In addition, as shown in FIG. 25, on the small screen as a specific display area, display related to the hold / active change effect such as variable display of background image or decorative pattern, effect image, etc. (for example, character in hold display or active display, action effect Display other than the image etc.) is performed, and no hold display or active display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity which is given by displaying corresponding displays corresponding to variable displays such as a hold display and an active display in a plurality of display areas.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of a rendering operation of a movable body effect, and more specifically, a diagram showing an example of a rendering operation when only a movable body effect is performed as a prefetch effect. As described above, in the movable body effect, a special movable body effect for displaying an effect image for effectively making the movable body 99 operate is displayed on a small screen as a specific display area, and the effect Since a (normal) movable body effect that displays an image near the movable body 99 in the image display device 5 can be performed, the difference will be described. As shown in FIG. 24A, the third hold display is stored during variable display (three hold displays are displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H shown in FIG. 24A), and the active display area 5HA is displayed. An active display AH and a pedestal display AHA are displayed on the), and the case where the hold is determined as the target hold will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 24 (B), when the variable display under execution is finished and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 24 (C), the movable body effect for 2 seconds from the start of the variable display As the movable body 99 rotates, the effect image (the effect image 44 shown in FIG. 24C) is displayed. In this case, since the enlarged display is not performed, the effect image is different from FIG. 25B, FIG. 25D, FIG. It is displayed in the vicinity (the effect image 44 is displayed in the vicinity of the movable body 99 as shown in FIG. 24C). Also, unlike FIG. 25 (B) etc., the background image (background image 66 shown in FIG. 24 (A)) and the decorative design (decorative design 5L, 5C, 5R shown in FIG. 24 (A)) Displayed and not displayed on a small screen. When two seconds have passed since the start of the variable display, the movable body effect is ended, and the rotation operation of the movable body 99 is stopped and the effect image is also erased. Thereafter, the movable object presentation is executed at each fluctuation until the fluctuation (target fluctuation) corresponding to the target suspension is started (including the target fluctuation).

  In addition, as in the movable body effect in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, when executing the movable body effect a plurality of times before the target change, the speed of the rotation operation in each time is gradually increased or the color of the effect image is You may change it. In this case, the effect image of the final color in the hold / active change presentation may be displayed in the final stage of the movable object presentation. According to this, it is possible to maintain a sense of unity in the effects and to improve the game interest. The movable body 99 may be provided with an LED or a lamp, and may be lighted or blinked in various colors according to the rotation operation. For example, the movable body 99 may be provided with an LED, and light may be emitted in a color according to the degree of expectation and may be rotated (that is, the movable body effect may be performed in a different manner according to the degree of expectation). Then, the color of the effect image displayed as the effect auxiliary display may be set as the color according to the light emission color of the LED. According to this, the rendering effect can be improved. In addition, the execution pattern of the presentation assistance display can be diversified, and the decline in the game entertainment can be prevented. Furthermore, in the movable body effect, the operation sound may be output in accordance with the rotation operation of the movable body 99. In this case, even if the movable object effect being executed is a small-screen effect as a specific display area, or different speakers depending on whether the effect image is displayed on a small screen as a specific display area or a normal movable object effect. Good. For example, in the normal movable body effect, while the operation sound is output by the speaker 8L and the speaker 8R, in the movable body special effect, the speaker on the side where the specific display area is displayed (in the example shown in FIG. 25) Since the small screen as the specific display area is displayed on the left side of the image display device, the operation sound may be output only from the speaker 8L). In addition, during the period when the small screen as the specific display area is displayed (that is, the period when the hold / active change effect is being executed), all the audio output related to the display performed on the small screen as the specific display area is It may be made to output only from the speaker by which the specific display area is displayed. According to this, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.

  The effect control CPU 120 can execute two types of effects such as hold / active change effect and movable object effect as prefetch effect. Then, when executing both hold / active change effect and movable object effect, the effect image is displayed on the small screen as the specific display area displayed on the image display device 5, and the movable body is different from the normal mode. It is possible to carry out an effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the amusement of the game due to a decrease in the visibility of the effect.

  When the effect control CPU 120 executes both the hold / active change effect and the movable object effect, the effect image is displayed on the small screen as the specific display area displayed on the image display device 5 to obtain the movable object effect. Informing the player that is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the movable object effect is being performed, and to improve the game interest. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute, as a hold / active change effect, a hold / active change effect for performing enlarged display. Therefore, it can be easily recognized that the display mode changes as the hold / active change effect, and the game interest can be improved.

  The effect control CPU 120 causes the movable body 99 to rotate as movable object effect, and displays an effect image as an effect auxiliary display so as to effectively highlight that the movable body 99 is operating. Then, when performing only the movable body effect, the effect image is displayed in the vicinity of the movable body 99 in the image display device 5, while both the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect are performed. The effect image is displayed on a small screen as a specific display area. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately perform the presentation support display, and the game interest can be improved.

  Further, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold / active change effect for performing the enlarged display, the display (background, etc., for example, the hold display or the active display, the character image in the action effect, etc.) relating to the hold / active change effect. All display of images and decorative patterns, effect images, etc.) is performed on a small screen as a specific display area, and no on-hold display or active display is displayed on a small screen. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity which is given by displaying corresponding displays corresponding to variable displays such as a hold display and an active display in a plurality of display areas. In addition, the CPU for effect control may perform all display other than display related to hold / active change effect such as background image or variable display, and notice effect other than hold / active change effect on the small screen as a specific display area. It is possible. Therefore, the visibility of the effect is improved, and the effect of the effect can be improved, and the game interest can be improved.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 ends the hold / active change effect after the movable object effect is ended, and after the hold / active change effect is ended, the small screen as the specific display area is not displayed and the control by the small screen is ended. . Therefore, the end timing of the effect becomes clear, and the effect can be enhanced. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 changes the state to enable the player to recognize in the pending / active change effect, which pending object is the preview object of the pre-reading effect. That is, the display mode is changed to a specific display mode when the hold / active change effect is performed. Therefore, the target on which the on-hold / active change presentation is performed becomes clear, and the presentation effect can be improved.

  Further, the CPU for effect control 120 can execute the movable object effect according to the degree of expectation, and displays an effect image as an effect auxiliary display in the movable object effect. Then, in the case where the suspension / active change effect of performing the enlarged display is further performed (when the specific condition of performing both the suspension / active change effect of performing the enlarged display and the movable object effect is satisfied), the effect image is displayed. It is possible to display at a different position as compared with the case where the suspension / active change effect for performing the enlarged display is not performed (when the specific condition is not satisfied). Therefore, it is possible to diversify the execution pattern of the presentation assistance display, and to prevent the decrease in the game entertainment. More specifically, when the suspension / active change effect for performing enlarged display is performed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable object special effect as the movable object effect, thereby effecting the effect image on the small screen as the specific display area. indicate. Therefore, it can be easily recognized that the specific condition can be established, and the game interest can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, on the screen of the image display device 5, the active display area 5HA is arranged in proximity to the start winning storage display area 5H, and the active display is displayed in proximity to the hold display. As a result, when the hold display is erased, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the active display.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and one of the embodiments described above can solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a configuration of part. Further, at least a part of each of the following modifications may be combined.

  In the above embodiment, in the hold / active change effect for performing the enlarged display, it is possible to recognize which hold the variable display that is the advance notice target is by performing the action effect (the hold / active change effect is performed This is an example, although an example (see FIG. 25B) in which the special display mode is displayed only in the case is shown. For example, the effect presentation may be performed only when changing the display mode of the active display, or may not be performed when the special display mode is selected. Note that the timing at which the special display mode is changed may be the timing at which the suspension / active change effect is started, or the timing at which the suspension (target suspension) corresponding to the variable display of the advance notice object is shifted The timing of the shift may be determined. Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the enlarged display may not be performed when executing the hold / active change effect in which the display mode of the active display changes to “green” or “red”. When executing a hold / active change effect in which the display mode of the active display changes to “green” or “red”, 100% enlarged display may be performed. In addition, even when holding / active change presentation is performed in which the display mode of the active display is changed to “white” or “blue”, enlarged display may be performed. Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown where the target of the enlarged display is all the held display and the active display itself when enlarged and displayed in the hold / active change effect, but in addition to this, the held display The display unit for active display and a display area (for example, a pedestal display or a part divided into areas) may be enlarged and displayed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the pending / active change presentation and the movable object presentation are performed as the pre-reading effect, and the pending / active change presentation and the movable subject presentation to perform the enlarged display are performed in the same period. Although the example which makes the execution aspect of movable body presentation different (it performs movable body special presentation) was shown, this is an example. The said conditions are not restricted to two types of effects performed as pre-reading effects being performed in the same period. For example, the notice effect for the variation performed during the variable display is performed in the same period during the display, such as a notice by the character, a notice by using characters, a notice by using characters and telops, a notice of background change to change the background mode, etc. It is sufficient if two types of effects performed in any state are performed in the same period, such as the effect performed in the same period, and if one of the effects is performed, the other effect is difficult to see For example, the type of effect may be any effect. In addition, one of the effects may be preview effect and the other effect may be preview effect for the change performed during the variable display. Moreover, the effects performed in the same period are not limited to two types, and may be three or more types. In this case, the specific display area may be further displayed. Moreover, when three or more types of effects are performed in the same period, a plurality of effects may be performed on the small screen as the specific display area. In addition, by displaying a simulated linked chance symbol that is a simulated linked chance on the small screen as the specific display area, the enlargement control may be performed over a plurality of fluctuations in the fluctuation. In the above embodiment, the specific display area is displayed in the image display device 5. However, in the gaming machine or the like provided with the sub liquid crystal in addition to the image display device 5, the specific display area is displayed. The display performed on the small screen as the specific display area may be performed on the sub liquid crystal. In the above embodiment, on the condition that the suspension / active change presentation and the movable object presentation are performed in the same period, the mode of execution of the movable object presentation is made different, and the suspension display and the active display are displayed preferentially. In the example shown in, on the contrary, the movable object presentation may be prioritized. Specifically, it is possible to execute an advance notice effect to operate the movable body 99 to fill the screen of the image display device 5, and in that case, a hold display or an active display may be displayed on a small screen as a specific display area. .

  Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the various images displayed on the small screen have the same ratio as the image displayed on the image display device 5, that is, the screen size of the image display device 5 is 10 If the screen size of the small screen is 1, an example in which the image displayed on the small screen has a ratio of 1/10 of the size displayed on the image display device 5 has been shown, but this is an example. is there. As described above, in the small screen as the specific display area, all displays other than the image displayed in the hold / active change effect such as the hold display or the active display, the character image in the action effect, etc. are performed. Among them, when performing effects requiring the player's operation, such as button effects, etc., only the image prompting the operation (promotion display) should not be reduced at the same ratio as the image displayed on the image display device 5 (The small screen may be reduced to one tenth, and the button display as the prompt may be reduced to two tenths). According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the promotion display. Further, during the display of the small screen as the specific display area, the execution of effects requiring the player's operation such as button effects may be prohibited. According to this, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the hold / active change presentation. The button effect to be executed after the end of the hold / active change effect may be executable.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the hold / active change effect for performing the enlarged display is executed, the effect effect is executed, and the display mode of the active display is a display with a relatively high expectation such as “green” or “red”. Although the example which changes to an aspect was shown, this is an example. For example, the effect presentation for changing the active display may include success presentation and failure presentation. Specifically, when the success effect is performed, the display mode of the active display changes from the special display mode to "green" or "red", while when the failure effect is performed, the special display mode To the normal mode, which is "gray". In addition, when a failure rendition is performed, the display mode may be changed to the display mode of “white” or “blue” instead of the normal mode.

  In the above embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, in the hold change effect, the player can recognize the advance notice object (change to the special display mode), and the display color changes only in the active change effect. Although shown, the display color may be changed in the hold change effect. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the effect presentation is not performed in the suspension / active change presentation in which the enlarged display is not performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by performing the on-hold change presentation as shown in FIG. 26, the operation regarding the variable display corresponding to the on-hold display may be notified. In the example shown in the drawing, the case is described in which the on-hold change effect as the on-hold / active change effect without enlargement display is executed as an example, but in the on-hold change effect as on-hold / active change effect in which the enlarged display is performed Is also applicable.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the on-hold change effect. The on-hold change effect shown in the figure is whether or not the color of the on-target display changes when the color ball thrown away toward one of the on-hold displays collides with the target's on-hold display (that is, acts). It is a production that shows The setting here is based on the premise that the color ball must always hit the target holding display, and the player is entertained with an effect of whether or not the ball is broken. Of course, it may be set so that an effect may be generated such that the thrown ball does not collide with the object's hold display. If the ball splits beautifully and the color of the pending display changes, the rendering result is successful, and if the color of the pending display does not change without breaking the ball, it is a failure. When it succeeds, the degree of expectation that the pending display is a big hit is higher than when it fails. It is also referred to as "updating" that the color of the reserved display changes to a color with high expectation such as a big hit.

  The on-hold change effect shown in the figure has one feature in that the speed of the color ball thrown off toward one of the on-hold indications is decelerated halfway. In particular, the length of the deceleration period is not uniform, and is determined from at least two types, and the possibility that the rendering result will be successful is higher when the deceleration period is longer than when the deceleration period is short. However, regardless of which deceleration period is selected, the timing at which the ball starts to decelerate after being thrown is common.

  Various images are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 during the variable display of the decorative design indicated by the three downward arrows. At the lower end, the image TH or H displaying the generated pending storage information is displayed corresponding to the number of pending storage information (hereinafter referred to as a pending storage image or a pending display). In these pending displays, the pending storage image may be displayed in a form in which the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number are distinguished. In the active display area 5HA at the lower left of the screen, a position display AHA (base display AHA) indicating a display position of the active display is displayed. An active display AH is displayed above the pedestal display AHA. In addition, when performing as suspension change production in suspension / active change production which performs enlarged display, as the variable display of the decorative symbol shown by the downward three arrows in the example shown in the figure is shown in the above-mentioned embodiment, it is specific It may be performed on a small screen as a display area. In this case, the hold display and the active display shown in FIG. 26 may be enlarged and displayed (in the example shown, the movable body 99 is omitted).

  Referring to FIG. 26A, a character 930 having a color ball 931 appears during variable display of the decorative design. The appearance timing of the character 930 can be set variously. However, it is necessary to prevent the holding display from being wasted by shifting the hold display during the effect period between the appearance of the character 930 and the outcome of success or failure of the effect. Therefore, the character 930 is made to appear at a stage where the remaining period of the variable display is sufficiently longer than the rendering period.

  The character 930 throws the color ball 931 toward the second hold display TH from the left of the four hold displays appearing on the screen. The time from when the character 930 throws the color ball 931 until the color ball 931 encounters the hold indication TH is a predetermined period. The length of the predetermined period is different depending on whether the effect is successful or not, but may be the same. In any case, the speed of the color ball 930 changes in the predetermined period.

  The color ball 931 moves at a constant speed for a certain period of time after it has been thrown (until it moves a predetermined distance), but the speed is reduced when the certain period has elapsed. That is, the deceleration period is entered. The situation is shown in FIG. 26 (b). The effect of such deceleration control is, for example, an effect of slow motion reproduction. The deceleration period is 3 seconds or 5 seconds. However, regardless of which deceleration period is set, the period from when the character 930 throws the ball until it enters the deceleration period is common. After the deceleration period due to such slow motion reproduction, the speed of the color ball 931 returns to the initial speed again, and the color ball 931 eventually collides with the target hold indication TH. Note that the effect may be ended while the vehicle is decelerating without returning to the initial velocity, or the velocity after the end of the deceleration period may be different from the velocity in the initial velocity or the deceleration period.

  After that, the pattern of the effect is that the color ball 931 which has collided is broken, the paint in the cover covers the target display of the target, and the successful pattern in which the color of the display is changed to a different color from the original Instead, it bounces and it divides into a failure pattern in which the color of the hold display does not change. FIG. 26C shows a success pattern, and FIG. 26D shows a failure pattern. In the case of the success pattern, the push button 31B vibrates before the color ball 931 breaks, and the player is notified of the success pattern (button notification effect). This can improve the player's sense of expectation. Of course, the push button 31B may or may not vibrate. Note that such advance notification may be performed by voice or image instead of or in addition to the push button 31B. Also, the button notification effect may be determined by lottery. In such a case, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation be higher in the case where the push button 31B vibrates than in the case where the push button 31B does not vibrate. In addition, the vibration of the push button 31B may be strong or weak. In such a case, a lottery including the strength of the push button 31B may be performed at the time of the lottery of the button notification effect. Then, the jackpot expectation may be higher in the case where the push button 31B vibrates stronger than in the case where the push button 31B vibrates weakly.

  In the success pattern, the color of the hold display changes from the original color (eg, gray) to one of a plurality of colors. For example, the variations of the color are white, blue, green and red. Such a color difference represents, for example, a difference in the degree of expectation that the variable display corresponding to the reserved display will be a big hit. For example, red is the most likely to hit the jackpot, followed by green and then blue. The player can provide a more entertaining game because it can focus on which color changes in the success pattern. In order to further increase the expectation for the change in color, the movement of the ball may be temporarily stopped at the stage when the color ball 931 collides with the hold display or just before the collision.

  As described above, according to the on-hold change effect described above, since there is a period in which the speed of the color ball 931 is decelerated before the color ball 931 is released and before it collides with the on-hold display, It can enhance the feeling. In particular, the player's sense of expectation is significantly improved as compared with the effect of causing the on-hold display to collide with the color ball 931 at the same speed without reducing the speed of the color ball 931. Further, since the deceleration period is set selectively from among a plurality of items, it is possible to provide a variety of effects while making the player pay attention to the deceleration period.

  In the above embodiment, the color of the active display or the hold display changes in the active change production or the hold display change production, but the size or shape of the active display or the hold display changes, etc. The display may change in various ways. In addition, although red, green, blue, and white, which are colors of active display and hold display, can be used for both active display and hold display, there are colors, characters, characters, etc. displayed only during active display. There may be a color, a character, a character, etc. which are displayed only at the hold display of the hold display.

  Further, in the above embodiment, by using the pre-reading effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 18, the pre-reading effect execution ratio is made different between the case of big hit and the case of losing, but it is not limited to this. For example, when reach effect is not performed if reach effect is performed by making the execution ratio of the advance effect different depending on the presence / absence of reach effect corresponding to the start winning based on the change pattern corresponding to the change category command The execution ratio of the pre-reading effect may be set higher than that. Also, based on the fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation category command, the execution ratio of the pre-reading effect is made different, and when fluctuation time is more than predetermined time, pre-reading effect is executed rather than the case of less than predetermined time. The ratio may be increased.

  In the above embodiment, the type of the big hit is determined based on the value of the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type, but the condition for determining the type of big hit is not limited to this. For example, a specific area may be provided in the vicinity of or inside the special winning opening, and the type of the big hit may be determined based on the game ball entering (passing) the specific area. . For example, in the case of providing the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit may be determined based on the game ball entering the specific area.

  In the above embodiment, the big hit gaming state is controlled based on the big hit symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, but the big hit gaming state is controlled. The aspect to perform is not limited to this. For example, a specific area is provided in the vicinity of the second starting winning opening or inside the second starting winning opening, and is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the game ball entering (passing) in the specific area You may be there.

  In the above-mentioned embodiment, although a mode which carries out variable display of a plurality of kinds of special symbols, such as a number or a symbol of 0-9, and derives and displays a display result is shown, variable display is not limited to such a mode. For example, the special symbol to be displayed variably may be different from the special symbol to be derived and displayed as the variable display result. In other words, special symbols that are not included in the changing multiple types of special symbols may be derived and displayed as the variable display result, and among the changing multiple types of special symbols, those that are not specially derived displayed as the variable display result May be included. Moreover, it is not necessary to variably display a plurality of types of special symbols, and the aspect may be such that variable display is performed using only one type of special symbol. As a variable display using one type of special symbol, for example, the one type of special symbol may be blinked (may be alternately turned on / off). That is, repetition of lighting and extinguishing may be variable display. And even in this case, the one kind of special symbol may be derived and displayed (lit) at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end It may be In addition, the same applies to variable display of other symbols (for example, a normal symbol, a decorative symbol, etc.).

  For example, in the above, “percentage” is not limited to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, such as A: B = 100%: 0% It is a concept that also includes a relationship (that is, a concept that includes 100% for one and 0% for the other). Also, when A is said to have a higher proportion than B, this is a concept that also includes cases where A is 100% and B is less than 100%, and B is 0% and A is greater than 0%. is there.

  Further, for example, in the above embodiment, one fluctuation is started when the fluctuation is started in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation mode such as the fluctuation time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of pseudo link. Although the example which transmits a pattern designation command was shown, you may make it notify a change pattern to the production control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the microcomputer 100 for game control is the first command before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo reciprocation, presence or absence of slip effect (if it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type and re-lottery effect (if it does not reach, so-called (2) after the stop may be transmitted a command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode. In this case, the effect control board 12 may perform effect control in the variable display based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board 12 selects a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. It is also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. As described above, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern designation command.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, and it encloses the gaming media and scores based on the occurrence of a prize. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine to be granted.

  In addition, what is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol is only one kind of outlying symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and the variable display is performed by repeating the display and the extinguishment of the symbol. It is also good. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above embodiment, although the main side performs the pre-read determination and transmits the command corresponding to the determination result to the sub side, the main side transmits the command indicating the random value and the sub side performs the pre-read determination. You may do it.

  Further, in the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is set as the “probable change state” by determining the big hit type at the start of the change, but the opening of the big winning opening at the start of the change Only the pattern (the mode of the round game) is determined (you need to specify by the big hit classification etc.), based on the fact that the game ball passes the specified area (for example, the specified area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state The gaming state after the jackpot gaming state may be set to the “probable change state”.

  In addition, for example, using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified by recording information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card, a game score for use in a game is awarded and awarded. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in a game machine into the game area using the game score or the game score given by the game winning.

  In the above description, the game machine uses game media as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a game medium as a predetermined number of prizes, but is a game medium such as a game ball The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that provides a score when the condition for giving a prize is satisfied.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed / provided by a removable recording medium to the computer device etc. included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the computer device etc. may be previously provided. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in the storage device of. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  And the execution form of the game is not limited to that executed by attaching the removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  The present invention is not limited to the one described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the embodiment and the modifications described above, and the configurations shown in the later-described form examples and the modifications may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be understood that the above-described embodiment disclosed this time and the form described below are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  Another gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state by providing display means (for example, the image display device 5 etc.) capable of performing variable display, and it is possible by a predetermined effect means Suggestive effect executing means that executes suggestive effect that suggests whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state according to the aspect of the effect to be performed, and that the presentation support means can execute the production assistance display related to the suggestive effect (For example, the CPU 120 for effect control that executes the process of step S804 or step S805), and the suggestion effect execution unit can execute the effect auxiliary display at different positions depending on whether a specific condition is satisfied (E.g., execute the process of step S805 when it is determined to be Yes in step S803), and an aspect involving an operation (e.g., an exit position). Specific display corresponding to variable display (for example, in the mode of switching the display position to the retraction position, the mode of switching to the display mode of opening the eyes from the expression mode of no expression or switching to the display mode of flowing tears) Active display corresponding to fluctuation, pending display corresponding to fluctuation not started yet can be displayed, and display mode of specific display (for example, display color (white, blue, red). Shape, pattern, position to be displayed , Or the range may be displayed. For example, by performing steps S90663B and S90667B in microcomputer 90100 for effect control, active display is displayed, and steps S903911 and S903929 are performed. Display the hold display and change the display mode of the specific display by performing step S904713. Change suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) that can execute change indication effects (for example, change effects (first change effect, second change effect)) that suggest changes in the display mode of the specific display In the microcomputer 90100, a change effect is set in step S904506, a process table corresponding to the change effect is selected in step S908004, and a portion performing change effect by performing steps S908006 and S908105). Is the operation mode of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed (for example, display position (advanced position, retracted position), operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency), display direction (for example, downward, rightward) It is possible to change the display mode of the specific display at different rates depending on other operation modes. (For example, by executing steps S904707 to S904709, the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs 100% when the display position of the specific display to be subjected to the first change effect is the exit position. While the display mode of the specific display is changed, the display mode of the specific display is not changed when the display position of the specific display which is the execution target of the first change effect is a withdrawal position (0% of the specific display The display mode is changed)) a gaming machine.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the execution pattern of the presentation assistance display, and to prevent the decrease in the game entertainment. In addition, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

  Furthermore, the execution pattern of the presentation assistance display can be diversified, and a decrease in gaming interest can be prevented, and variable display can be performed as an example of the form of a gaming machine that can make the player pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display. A game machine capable of playing an action (for example, a mode of switching a display position to an advanced position or a retreat position, a display mode of opening eyes from a display mode of no expression, or a display mode of flowing tears A specific display corresponding to the variable display (for example, an active display corresponding to a change being executed, a pending display corresponding to a change not yet started) can be displayed in the switching mode, and a display mode of the specific display (for example, , Display color (white, blue, red), which may be a shape, a pattern, a position, a range, etc. to be displayed. The active display is displayed by performing steps S90663B and S90667B in 0100, the hold display is displayed by performing steps S903911 and S903929, and the portion for changing the display mode of the specific display by performing step S904713), Step in the change suggestion effect execution means (for example, the microcomputer 90100 for effect control) capable of executing change indication effects (for example, change effects (first change effect, second change effect)) suggesting a change in display mode of display A change effect is set in step S904506, a process table corresponding to the change effect is selected in step S908004, and the step of performing change effect by performing steps S908006 and S908105). Operation mode of specific display when effect is executed (for example, display position (advanced position, retracted position). Other operation mode such as operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) or display direction (for example, downward, right) The display mode of the specific display can be changed at a different rate depending on whether the first change effect is to be executed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904707 to S904709). When the display position of the specific display which is is the exit position, the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 100%, while the display position of the specific display to be subjected to the first change presentation is the withdrawal position In some cases, the display mode of the specific display is not changed (the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 0%)). Below, an example of this embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other embodiments)
Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. This other embodiment may be referred to as an "embodiment". FIG. 27 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 viewed from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 is configured of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in the shape of a frame provided so as to be openable and closable in the game frame. The play frame is a front frame (not shown) installed openably and closably to the outer frame, a mechanism board (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (a game to be described later And the board 906).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 902 is a striking ball supply plate (upper plate) 903. At the lower part of the hit ball supply tray 903 is provided a surplus ball receiving tray 904 for storing gaming balls which can not be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 903 and a hit operation handle (operation knob) 905 for firing a hit ball. In addition, a game board 906 is removably attached to the back of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-like body that constitutes the game board and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, on the front of the game board 906, a game area 907 is formed in which the thrown game balls can flow down.

  Near the center of the game area 907, an effect display device 909 configured of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 909 has an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Thus, the effect display device 909 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, there are symbol display areas for variably displaying effect symbols for three decorations (for effect), for example, “left”, “middle” and “right”. There are symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right" in the symbol display area, but the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 909, or the symbol Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 909 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When variable display of the first special symbol is being executed by the first special symbol display device 908a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 909 to execute effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed by the symbol display 908b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 909 along with the variable display, so it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game. .

  Further, in the effect display device 909, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, left middle right symbol is the same symbol Stop, swing, scale, shrink or deform in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the display symbols are changed An effect performed in a state where the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called reach effect. In addition, reach state and the appearance are called reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 909 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes "off", and the variation display state is ended. A player plays while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 909, fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d are provided to display a fourth symbol that follows the effect symbol, the special symbol to be described later, and the normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, and the second A fourth symbol display area 909 d for the second special symbol is provided, in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the production symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (but, correctly, the variation display of the presentation symbol changes on the side of the microcomputer 90100 for effect control) It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing the rendering using the rendering display device 909, for example, the rendering content including the fluctuating display of the rendering pattern disappears from the screen for a moment Effects are being diversified, such as effects being performed, and effects such as moving objects blocking all or part of the screen being performed. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the effect display device 909, there are cases where it is difficult to recognize whether or not it is currently in the state of fluctuating display. So, in this embodiment, by performing the change display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 909, is the state of the current change display now by confirming the state of the fourth symbol? It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. In addition, since the 4th design is always changed and displayed in a fixed operation, and it does not disappear from the screen or is shielded by a shield, it can always be viewed.

  The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol and the second special The fourth symbol display area 909 d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol display area.

  Variation of the fourth symbol (variable display) is realized by continuing turning on and off of the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d with a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at predetermined time intervals. . The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol are synchronized. Note that “variable display synchronizes” means that the start point and end point of the variable display are the same and the variable display period is the same. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 908a, the display color that recalls the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the off. For example, the off) Sometimes it is displayed in blue while it is displayed in red when it is a big hit Note that the type of big hit (usually the display color may differ depending on whether it is a big hit or a probability change big hit). When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 908b, the display color which recalls the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol (display color different from the discolored one For example, it is displayed in blue when it is out of place, it is displayed in red when it is a big hit. The display color may be changed depending on which is the big hit.) The display color of the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d when the light is turned off is the background when the light is turned off. It is desirable that the display image has a display color (eg, black) different from that of the background image in order to prevent the image assimilating and disappearing.

  In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area is provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 909, but separately from the effect display device 909, a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED is used. The fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which two LEDs are alternately lit, and any one of the two LEDs is stopped. It may be displayed whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed depending on whether it is displayed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided respectively corresponding to the separate fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d is shown, the first special symbol and the second special are illustrated. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided on part of the display screen of the effect display device 909. Further, the fourth symbol display area common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be realized using a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED. In this case, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing display such as repeating display and display of different display colors at predetermined time intervals. Also, for example, when performing the fluctuation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and when performing the fluctuation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, for example The variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing display such as turning on and off repeatedly at different time intervals. Also, for example, the same big hit symbol is used for deriving and displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and for deriving and displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Alternatively, stop symbols of different modes may be stopped and displayed.

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 906, a first special symbol display (a first variable display unit) 908a that variably displays a first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 908a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the first special symbol display 908a is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). At the lower right of the game board 906, a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 908b for variably displaying a second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 908 b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 908b is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols).

  The small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the kind of 1st special symbol and the kind of 2nd special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers of 0-9), kinds may differ. In addition, the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b may be configured to variably display, for example, the numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols).

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 908a and the second special symbol indicator 908b are generically referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable indicator) There is something to do.

  Although this embodiment shows the case where two special symbol displays 908a and 908b are provided, the gaming machine may have only one special symbol display.

  The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening After passing 9014 (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed It is a state, and it is started based on the state where the big hit game is not executed) being established, and when the variable display time (variation time) passes, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. The game ball passing means that the game ball has passed through an area previously defined as a winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept including that the gaming ball is in the winning opening (winning) It is. Furthermore, deriving and displaying a display result means to stop and display a symbol (example of identification information).

  Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first start winning opening 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 9013 is guided to the back of the game board 906, and is detected by the first start opening switch 9013a.

  Further, a variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning opening 9014 capable of winning a game ball is provided below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 9013. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 9014 is guided to the back of the game board 906, and is detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a. The variable winning ball device 9015 is opened by the solenoid 9016. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 9014 (it becomes easy to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the game ball is more likely to win the second starting winning hole 9014 than the first starting winning hole 9013. Also, in a state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second start winning opening 9014. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the game ball is more likely to win the first starting winning hole 9013 than the second starting winning hole 9014. In the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it may be configured to be able to win (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win).

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 9015 is controlled to the open state, the gaming ball heading to the variable winning ball device 9015 is extremely likely to win a prize in the second start winning opening 9014. And although the first start winning opening 9013 is provided immediately below the effect display device 909, the distance between the lower end of the effect display device 909 and the first start winning opening 9013 may be further narrowed, or the first start winning opening It is difficult to arrange the nails closely around 9013 and to make it difficult to guide the game ball to the first start winning opening 9013 by arranging the nails around the first starting winning opening 9013, and the winning ratio of the second start winning opening 9014 You may make it be higher than the prize-winning rate of the 1st starting winning a prize mouth 9013.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, a variable winning ball device 9015 is provided to open and close only to the second start winning opening 9014. The configuration may be such that a variable winning ball device that performs opening and closing operations is provided for any of the start winning openings 9014.

  On the side of the first special symbol display 908a, the number of activated winning balls entering the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the first number of pending storages (pending storage is also referred to as starting storage or starting prize storage) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage indicator 9018a consisting of four indicators is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 9018a increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the first special symbol display 908a is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second special symbol display 908b, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 9018b consisting of four indicators to display the number of activated winning balls entered the second start winning opening 9014, ie, the second reserve memory number Is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 9018b increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 909, a suspension storage display unit 9018c for displaying one of the first suspension storage number and the second suspension storage number is provided. For example, the pending storage display unit 9018c displays the first pending storage number in the low base state, and displays the second pending storage number in the high base state. The first pending storage number and the second pending storage number may be displayed separately. Also, a combined hold storage display unit may be provided that displays the total number of pending storages, which is the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of satisfaction of execution conditions in which the variable display start condition is not satisfied. Further, when configured as such, in the combined hold storage display unit, the first hold storage and the second hold storage are displayed side by side in the winning order to the first start winning opening 9013 and the second start winning opening 9014 To be displayed in a recognizable manner as to whether it is the first pending storage or the second pending storage (for example, the first pending storage is displayed in red and the second pending storage is displayed in blue) It may be configured.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pending storage display unit 9018c performs pending display for pending storage for which no change has yet been made, and the pending from the start of the variable display for the pending storage to the end thereof. The hold display for storage is continuously displayed on the active display unit 9018 d different from the hold storage display unit 9018 c. That is, in the active display unit 9018d, the active display (the variable display corresponding image) corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed.

  Hereinafter, the pending storage display unit 9018 c, the active display unit 9018 d, and the range surrounding the pending storage display unit 9018 c and the active display unit 9018 d may be collectively referred to as an “interface image”. This interface image is displayed not only with or without the hold display or the active display, but it is deleted in a specific situation (for example, during execution of a specific effect such as a big hit game state or super reach). It is In addition, hereinafter, the hold display and the active display may be collectively referred to as "specific display".

  Specifically, the character of the mole is displayed as a hold display and an active display on the hold storage display unit 9018c and the active display unit 9018d. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 27, one active display and three pending displays are displayed.

  In addition, “white”, “blue” and “red” are provided as display modes of the specific display, and the reliability for becoming a big hit in the corresponding fluctuation is different. For example, the reliability for the jackpot is red> blue> white.

  The display mode of the specific display can be changed by performing a predetermined change effect. As the change effect, a first change effect in which the hammer is swung down toward the target specific display and a second change effect in which an arrow flies toward the target specific display are provided. The display mode of the specific display hit or the specific display hit by the arrow changes.

  Also, as the display position of the specific display, the advanced position (for example, the display position of the first holding display in FIG. 27) that appears to be jumping out from the ground and the retracted position (for example, 27 active display and display positions of the second and third hold displays. The display position of each specific display is controlled to be switched at random. For example, the switching frequency (operation frequency) of the display position is determined for each change, and the display position is switched based on the determined operation frequency.

  The effect display device 909 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 908a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 908b. Perform variable display of the effect design as a symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 909 are synchronized. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 909 are synchronized. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 908a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 908b, a rendering symbol that evokes a big hit in the effect display device 909 The combination of is displayed stopped.

  In this embodiment, as described later, the game control microcomputer 90560, which controls the fluctuation display of the special symbol, transmits a fluctuation pattern command capable of specifying the fluctuation time, and is received by the effect control microcomputer 90100. According to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation display of the rendering symbol is controlled. Therefore, since the fluctuation time is specified based on the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the fluctuation display of the rendering symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, in the event that a change in data of the fluctuation pattern command or the like occurs, the fluctuation time recognized by the game control microcomputer 90560 and the fluctuation time recognized by the effect control microcomputer 90100 There may be a gap between them. Therefore, when an unexpected situation such as data corruption of a command occurs, a situation may occur in which the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the rendering symbol are not completely synchronized.

  In the decorative portion around the effect display device 909, on the left side, a movable member 9078 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 9086 and moving when the motor 9086 rotates is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 9078 operates when a notice effect (movable object notice effect) is performed. Note that the movable member 9078 may be operated not only in the movable object preview effect but also in, for example, pseudo rendition effect or super reach effect.

  Further, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 909, a blade-shaped movable member (hereinafter referred to as effect blade role) attached to the lower left and right on the rotating shaft of the motor 9087 and moving when the motor 9087 rotates. 9079a and 9079b are provided. For example, the effect blade role products 9079a and 9079b operate when a notice effect (effect blade effect preview effect) is executed. Note that the effect blade combinations 9079 a and 9079 b may be operated, for example, in pseudo-series effects and super reach effects, without being limited to the effect blade role announcements.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 27, a special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided below the variable winning ball device 9015. Special variable winning ball device 9020 has an open / close plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 908b In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the display is derived, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 9021 so that the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 9023.

  The game area 906 is also provided with winning openings (normal winning openings) 9029, 9030, 9033, and 9039 for paying out a predetermined number of premium gaming balls determined in advance based on the winning of the gaming balls. The game balls having won in the winning openings 9029, 9030, 9033 and 9039 are detected by the winning opening switches 9029a, 9030a, 9033a and 9039a.

  On the right side of the game board 906, a normal symbol display 9010 is provided. The normal symbol display 9010 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “o” and “x”) usually called symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started. In this embodiment, the variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbol is visible when lit). For example, if the lower lamp is lit at the end of the variable display, it becomes a hit. . Then, when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the variable winning ball device 9015 is in a state advantageous to the player from a disadvantageous state (a state where the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 9014) Change to In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 9010, a normal symbol hold storage indicator 9041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls having passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time the game ball passes to the gate 9032, that is, whenever the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 9041 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, whenever variable display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Furthermore, a probability change state in which the probability determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is a high state (a state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit as a variation display result of the special symbol is increased as compared to the normal state). In the high probability state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 hits and the symbol is increased is increased, and the opening time and number of times of the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased.

  On the left and right periphery of the game area 907 of the game board 906, there is provided an decoration LED 9025 which blinks during the game, and at the lower part there is an out port 9026 from which hitting balls not winning are taken. Further, on the upper left and right sides outside the game area 907, two speakers 9027 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided. On the outer periphery of the game area 907, a frame LED 9028 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 903 are provided with operation buttons 90120 as operation means operable by the player. The operation button 90120 is provided with a push button switch that allows the player to perform a pressing operation. The operation button 90120 is provided not only with a push button switch that allows a player to perform a pressing operation, but also with a dial that allows a player to perform a rotation operation. The player can make a predetermined selection (for example, selection of an effect) by rotating the dial.

  In the game machine, a ball hitting and firing device (not shown) which drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball hitting operation handle 905 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch the game ball into the game area 907 ) Is provided. The game balls fired from the hit ball launching device enter the game area 7 through the ball hitting rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descend the game area 7. If the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a, it is possible to start variable display of the first special symbol (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first The start condition of 1 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 908a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 909. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning opening 9013. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first number of pending storages is increased by 1 on the condition that the first number of pending storages has not reached the upper limit value.

  If the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a, if it is in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, variable display of the special symbol ends, the second The start condition of 2 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display 908b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 909. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning opening 9014. If it is not in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second pending storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when the big hit is a probability change, the game state is shifted to a so-called positive change state after the big hit game is over, and the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball becomes easy to start winning (namely, special symbol It shifts to a high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that execution conditions of variable display in the displays 908a and 908b and the effect display device 909 are easily established. In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state is extended. It will be easier to get started.

  In addition, instead of extending the time when the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extension state), transition to the normal symbol probability state in which the probability of the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 hitting is increased. It is possible to move to the high base state. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol indicator 9010 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing transition control to the normal symbol probability change state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 will hit is increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened increases. Therefore, if it shifts to the normal symbol certainty variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning prize ball device 9015 are increased, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 is enhanced when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol or the stop symbol of a special symbol is a definite symbol, etc. Change to an advantageous state (start start winning state). Note that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept that includes changing from the closed state to the open state.

  In addition, the transition to the high base state may be made by transitioning to the normal symbol time short state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 is shortened. In the normal symbol time short state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency at which the variation of the normal symbol starts is increased, and as a result, the frequency at which the normal symbol is hit is increased. Therefore, when the frequency with which the normal symbol is hit is high, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state is high, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when transitioning to the high base state, transition is also made to the short time state (special symbol time short state) in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or the rendering symbol is shortened. By shifting to such a time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened, so the frequency of the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol and the effect symbol becomes high (in other words, It is possible to reduce the situation where an invalid start winning will occur. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  In addition, it is possible to start winning easily (transition to the high base state) by transitioning to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal pattern exact variation state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) May be In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high base (high base) (Transition to the state). In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high It may be made to shift to the base state).

  FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 9031. FIG. 28 also shows a payout control board 9037, an effect control board 9080, and the like. On the main substrate 9031 is mounted a microcomputer for game control (corresponding to game control means) 90560 which controls the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 for storing a program for game control (game progression control), a RAM 9055 as a storage unit used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 9057 including. In this embodiment, the ROM 9054 and the RAM 9055 are incorporated in the game control microcomputer 90560. That is, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to have at least the RAM 9055 in addition to the CPU 9056, and the ROM 9054 may be external or internal. Also, the I / O port unit 9057 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 90560 further includes a random number circuit 9053 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

  In addition, the RAM 9055 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage unit backed up by a backup power source, a part or all of which is created in the power supply substrate 90910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 9055 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply discharges and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). In particular, data indicating at least the game state (i.e., the special symbol process flag etc.) according to the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that all of the RAM 9055 is backed up by the power supply.

  Note that, since the CPU 9056 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 9054 in the gaming control microcomputer 90560, hereinafter, the gaming control microcomputer 90560 (or the CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing) Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control in accordance with a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate other than the main substrate 9031.

  The random number circuit 9053 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit according to the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 9053 updates numerical data in accordance with the set update rule within a numerical value range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set. Based on the fact that the winning is at the time of reading out (extraction) of numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read out is a random number.

  The random number circuit 9053 has a selection setting function of updating range of numerical data (setting selection function of initial value and selection setting function of upper limit value), a selection setting function of updating rule of numerical data, and selection of update rule of numerical data It has various functions such as switching function. Such a function can improve the randomness of the generated random number.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 9053. For example, the predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 90560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 9054 (ID number assigned with a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 90560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 9053. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 9053 can be further improved.

  In addition, an input driver circuit 9058 for giving detection signals from the gate switch 9032a, the start opening switch 9013a, the count switch 9023, the winning opening switches 9029a, 9030a, 9033a, and 9039a to the game control microcomputer 90560 is also mounted on the main substrate 9031 There is. The main circuit board also has a solenoid 9016 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 9015 and an output circuit 9059 for driving the solenoid 9021 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 9020 for forming the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 90560. It is mounted on the 9031.

  In addition, the microcomputer for gaming control 90560, the first special symbol indicator 908a which displays the special symbol variably, the second special symbol indicator 908b, the ordinary symbol indicator 9010 which variably displays the ordinary symbol, the first special symbol hold memory Display control of the display 9018a, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 9018b, and the normal symbol hold storage indicator 9041 is performed.

  Note that an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating the occurrence of a big hit gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main substrate 9031.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 9080 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 90560 through the relay board 9077. The effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 909 which variably displays the effect pattern is performed.

  In addition, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 9080 controls the display of the decoration LED 9025 provided on the game board and the frame LED 9028 provided on the frame side through the lamp driver board 9035. And controls the sound output from the speaker 9027 through the audio output substrate 9070.

  FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 9077, the effect control board 9080, the lamp driver board 9035, and the sound output board 9070. In the example shown in FIG. 29, the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver substrate 9035 and the sound output substrate 9070, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Furthermore, only the effect control substrate 9080 may be provided for effect control without providing the lamp driver substrate 9035 and the sound output substrate 9070.

  The effect control board 9080 is mounted with a CPU 90101 for effect control, and a microcomputer 90100 for effect control including a RAM for storing information on effects such as an effect pattern process flag and the like. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 90100 is not backed up by a power supply. In the effect control board 9080, the effect control CPU 90101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown) and takes in a signal taken from the main board 9031 input via the relay board 9077 ( In response to the effect control (INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 90102 and the input port 90103. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 90109 to perform display control of the effect display device 909 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 90109 for controlling display of the effect display device 909 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 90100 is mounted on the effect control board 9080. The VDP 90109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 90100, and maps the VRAM there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 90109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 909 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 90101 outputs to the VDP 90109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 909, specifically, data of a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect pattern), and background image data. It is a ROM for. The VDP 90109 reads out the image data from the CGROM in response to a command from the effect control CPU 90101. Then, the VDP 90109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 90102 in the effect control board 9080. The input driver 90102 only allows the signal input from the relay substrate 9077 to pass in the direction toward the inside of the effect control substrate 9080 (does not allow the signal to pass from the inside of the effect control substrate 9080 to the relay substrate 9077) It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulation means.

  As a signal direction regulation means which allows the signal input from the main substrate 9031 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control substrate 9080 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the effect control substrate 9080 to the relay substrate 9077) to the relay substrate 9077 Unidirectional circuit 9074 is mounted. For example, diodes or transistors are used as unidirectional circuits. A diode is illustrated in FIG. Also, unidirectional circuits are provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are outputted from the main substrate 9031 through the output port 90571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay substrate 9077 to the inside of the main substrate 9031 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 9077 does not enter the inside of the main board 9031 (the game control microcomputer 90560 side). The output port 90571 is a part of the I / O port unit 9057 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 90571 (the relay substrate 9077 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 90101 drives the motor 9086 to operate the movable member 9078 via the output port 90106. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 drives a motor 9087 for operating the effect blade role members 9079 a and 9079 b through the output port 90106.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs a signal from the operation button 90120 in accordance with the pressing operation of the operation button 90120 by the player via the input port 90107.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs a signal for driving an LED or a lamp to the lamp driver substrate 9035 via the output port 90105. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 9070 via the output port 90104.

  In the lamp driver substrate 9035, a signal for driving an LED or a lamp is input to the LED / lamp driver 90352 via the input driver 90351. The LED / lamp driver 90352 supplies current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 9028 based on a signal for driving the LED or the lamp. In addition, current is supplied to the decoration LED 9025 and the like provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output substrate 9070, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 90703 via the input driver 90702. The speech synthesis IC 90703 generates speech and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data, and outputs the speech and the sound to the amplification circuit 90705. The amplification circuit 90705 outputs to the speaker 9027 an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 90703 to a level according to the volume set in the volume 90706. The voice data ROM 90704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating in time series the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, a fluctuation period of the effect pattern).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the gaming control microcomputer 90560 on the main substrate 9031. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the microcomputer for gaming control 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) After the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the content of the program is valid, is performed, the main process after step S901 is started. In the main processing, the CPU 9056 first performs necessary initialization.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 9056 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S902), and a stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S903). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits), etc. (step S904), the RAM can be accessed (Step S905). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 9056 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 9056 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply substrate) input through the input port (step S906). When ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 9056 executes a normal initialization process (steps S9010 to S9015).

  If the clear switch is not in the ON state, it is checked whether data protection processing (for example, processing at the time of power supply stop such as addition of parity data) of the backup RAM area is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. (Step S907). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 9056 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

  After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 9056 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S 908). In this embodiment, parity check is performed as data check. Therefore, in step S 908, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of the power supply stop, the initialization process executed at the time of power-on not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 9056 returns the game state recovery processing to return the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of the power supply stop (steps S9041 to S9043 Process). Specifically, the top address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set as a pointer (step S9041), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 9055) (step S9042) ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. With the processing in steps S9041 and S9042, the saved content remains as it is for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data (special symbol process flag, positive change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped, the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer ), And a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 9056 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S9043). In addition, the CPU 9056 transmits a display result designation command specifying the display result (normal big hit, positive variation big hit, sudden positive variation big hit, small hit or departure) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 9080 (step S9044). Then, the process proceeds to step S9014. In step S9044, when, for example, the value of the special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 9056 also transmits the first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command (see FIG. 39). You may do it. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation specification command or the second symbol variation specification command.

  In this embodiment, the backup RAM area also stores the value of the fluctuation time timer described later. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S9044, the measurement of the value of the fluctuation time timer which has been saved is restarted, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the fluctuation time timer which has been timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is transmitted. Further, in this embodiment, the backup RAM area also stores the value of a special symbol process flag described later. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process processing is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  It should be noted that the CPU 9056 may first check whether the value of the fluctuation time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0 or not instead of transmitting the display result specification command at the time of power failure recovery. . Then, if the value of the fluctuation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the fluctuation time timer is 0, it is fluctuating at power failure. It may be determined not to be in the state, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  The CPU 9056 may first check whether the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is three. Then, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, it fluctuates at power failure. It may be determined that the display result designation command is not transmitted, judging that it is not inside.

  In this embodiment, although both the backup flag and the check data are used to check whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored or not, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the gaming state recovery process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 9056 first performs a RAM clear process (step S9010). In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number per judgment for normal symbols) is initialized to 0 by the RAM clear process, but it is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number per determination) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 9055. Also, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set as a pointer (step S9011), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S9012).

  By the processing of steps S9011 and S9012, for example, a flag for determining processing selectively according to the control state, such as a random symbol counter for determination per normal symbol, special symbol buffer, total prize ball number storage buffer, special symbol process flag, etc. The value is set.

  Also, the CPU 9056 is an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the gaming control microcomputer 90560 has executed the initialization process) for initializing the sub board (the board on which the microcomputer other than the main board 9031 is mounted). ) To the sub-substrate (step S9013). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 909 performs screen display for notifying that control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  The CPU 9056 also executes random number circuit setting processing to initialize the random number circuit 9053 (step S9014). The CPU 9056 performs, for example, processing in accordance with a random number circuit setting program to perform setting for causing the random number circuit 9053 to update the value of random R ′.

  Then, in step S9015, the CPU 9056 performs setting of a register of CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 90560 so that timer interruption is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 4 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S9010 to S9015) is completed, the CPU 9056 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S9017) and the initial value random number update process (step S9018) in the main process. When executing display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing, interrupt disabled state is set (step S9016), and when display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing is completed, interrupt permitted state is set. The setting is made (step S9019). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when not being a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to be a reach when not being a big hit. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of the count value of a counter (normal pattern random number generation counter for determination per pattern) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol. It is a random number to decide. The game control process for controlling the progress of the game to be described later (The game control microcomputer 90560 controls the game display devices such as the effect display device provided in the game machine, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, etc. by itself Count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern in the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer, or to control other microcomputers, the count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern is 1 round (take the random number for determination per normal pattern) When the value is advanced by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value, the initial value is set to the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is performed using the effect pattern variably displayed in the effect display device 909. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is made a big hit symbol, reach production is always executed (However, in the case of sudden positive change big hit, sudden change positive hit large hit symbol (for example "135") without becoming reach) May appear stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not made a big hit symbol, the gaming control microcomputer 90560 decides whether or not to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery for determining a variation pattern type and a variation pattern using random numbers. Do. However, it is the effect control microcomputer 90100 that actually executes the reach effect control.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-down detection process is performed to detect whether or not the power-off signal is output (is turned on or not) (step S9020). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply substrate detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, when the CPU 9056 detects that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 9056 executes a power-supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals of the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 are input through the input driver circuit 9058, and the state of those is determined (switch processing: step S9021 ).

  Next, the CPU 9056 is a first special symbol display 908a, a second special symbol display 908b, an ordinary symbol display 9010, a first special symbol hold storage indicator 9018a, a second special symbol hold storage indicator 9018b, an ordinary symbol A display control process is performed to control the display of the hold storage indicator 9041 (step S9022). For the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b and the normal symbol display 9010, drive signals are outputted to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S9032 and S9033. Execute control.

  Further, processing is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number, such as a normal symbol-performing determination random number used for game control (determination random number update process: step S9023). The CPU 9056 further performs processing of updating the initial value random number and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: steps S9024, S9025).

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs special symbol process processing (step S9026). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b and the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (step S9027). In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 9056 executes the corresponding processing in accordance with the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 9010 in a predetermined order. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state. In the normal symbol process processing of step S9027, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed based on the detection of the passage of the gaming ball to the gate 9032 to derive and display the result of the variable display, or the variable display result of the normal symbol Executes a process of controlling the variable winning ball device 9015 in the open state or in the closed state.

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs a process of sending out the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (effect control command control process: step S9028).

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs an information output process of outputting data such as big hit information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S9029).

  The CPU 9056 executes an award ball process for setting the number of award balls based on detection signals of the first start opening switch 9013a, the second start opening switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 (step S9030). Specifically, the payout control micro board mounted on the payout control board 9037 according to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 9097 in accordance with the payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 9056 relates to the ON / OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (step S9031: output processing).

  The CPU 9056 also performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S9032).

  Furthermore, the CPU 9056 performs normal symbol display control processing of setting normal symbol display control data for performing effect display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data ( Step S9033). For example, when the start flag relating to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 9056 switches the display state ("o" and "x") every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data (for example, 1 indicating "o" and 0 indicating "x") is switched every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 9056 outputs a drive signal in step S9022 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby executing effect display of a normal symbol in the normal symbol display 9010.

  Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S9034), and the process ends.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S9021 to S9033 (except for step S9029) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. May be performed in

  In the case where the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b and the effect display device 909 stop displaying shifted symbols, the variable display of the effect symbols is started after the variable display of the effect symbols starts A combination of predetermined rendering symbols that do not reach will be stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of "non-reach" (also referred to as "normally lost") when the variable display result is a lost design.

  In the case where the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b and the effect display device 909 stop displaying shifted symbols, the variable display of the effect symbols is started after the variable display of the effect symbols is started. The reach effect is executed after reaching the reach state, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not finally become a big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach") when the variable display result is "off".

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol is in the reach state. Finally, in the "left", "middle", and "right" symbol display areas 909L, 909C and 909R in the effect display device 9, the effect symbols are aligned and stopped (in the case of sudden definite variation big hit There is also a case where a sudden change big hit symbol (for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed without reaching.

  When "5" which is a small hit is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b, in the effect display device 909, the variable display mode of the effect design is "suddenly, certain variation big hit" In the same manner as in the above case, after the variable display of the rendering symbol is performed, a predetermined small hitting symbol (suddenly the same symbol as the probability changing big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the stop display of the small hit symbol "5" on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is referred to as a "small hit" variable display mode .

  Here, the small hit is an allowed hit up to the number of times the number of opening of the large winning opening is smaller than the number of the large winning opening (in this embodiment, two times of opening for 0.1 seconds). When the small hit game is over, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the positive change state to the normal state or from the normal state to the positive change state. In addition, the sudden change big hit is allowed the number of times the opening number of the big winning opening is small in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening time of 0.1 seconds twice), but the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely It is a short jackpot, and it is a jackpot to shift the gaming state after the jackpot game to a definite change state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it were suddenly changed to a definite change state Is). That is, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is the same between the sudden change big hit and the small hit suddenly. By controlling in this way, when the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 0.1 seconds, it is not possible to recognize whether it is a big hit or a small hit suddenly. (Perspective change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the case where the gaming machine is configured such that all the big hit types are probability variation big hits, it is not necessary to provide a small hit. In addition, when it is configured to provide a small hit if all the big hit type is a definite variation big hit, it is transitioned to a definite variation state (high probability state) and a sudden definite variation big hit without a short time state (high base state) Is preferably provided.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern of a rendering symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 32, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1'-1-1 as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the rendering symbol is "non-reach". A variation pattern of non-reach PA1'-4 is prepared. In addition, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the effect pattern is "reach", normal PA2'-1 to normal PA2'-2 and normal PB2'-1 to normal The variation patterns of PB2'-2, super PA3'-1-super PA3'-2, and super PB3'-1-super PB3'-2 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 32, the re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1'-4 that is used when not reaching and that is accompanied by the effect of the pseudo ream. When using normal PB2'-1 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed once. Moreover, when using normal PB2'-2 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA3'-1 to the super PA3'-2 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, re-variation is to execute the variable display of the production symbol again after temporarily stopping the production symbol that is temporarily distracted from the start of the variable display of the production symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32, in this embodiment, normal PA2'-3 to normal PA2'-4, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. Normal PB2'-3 to normal PB2'-4, super PA3'-3 to super PA3'-4, super PB3'-3 to super PB3'-4, special PG1'-1 to special PG1'-3, special PG2 A variation pattern of '-1 to special PG 2'-2 is prepared. In FIG. 32, the variation patterns of the special PG1'-1 to the special PG1'-3 and the special PG2'-1 to the special PG2'-2 are variation patterns used in the case of sudden probability variation big hit or small hit. is there. Further, as shown in FIG. 32, among the variation patterns with sudden rendition and pseudo rendition that are used when there is no sudden big change big hit or small hit, re-variation is performed once when using normal PB 2'-3. Moreover, when using normal PB2'-4 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA3'-3 to the super PA3'-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, a re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the special PG 1′-3 which is used in the case of a sudden big hit or small hit and which is accompanied by a pseudo rendition.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, when the fluctuation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, in the case of super reach A with pseudo link, the fluctuation time is 32). Fixed at .75 seconds, and in the case of Super Reach A without pseudo run, the variation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds), but even in the case of the same type of Super Reach, for example The fluctuation time may be varied according to the total number of pending storages. For example, even with the same type of super reach, as the total number of pending storages increases, the variation time may be shortened. In addition, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, in the case of performing variable display of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time may be varied according to the first number of pending storage, (2) In the case of performing variable display of a special symbol, the fluctuation time may be made different according to the second number of pending storages. In this case, separate determination tables are prepared for each value of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the pending storage number 0 to 2 and the pending storage number 3, 4 It is also possible to prepare a variation pattern type determination table for use), select the determination table according to the value of the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number, and make the variation time different.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory view of each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 '(MR1'): Determines the type of big hit (normal big hit described later, definite positive big hit, sudden positive positive big hit) (for big hit type judgment)
(2) Random 2 '(MR 2'): Determine the type (type) of variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 '(MR3'): Determine fluctuation pattern (variation time) (for fluctuation pattern judgment)
(4) Random 4 '(MR 4'): Determine whether to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol determination)
(5) Random 5 '(MR 5'): Determine the initial value of random 4 '(for random 4' initial value determination)

  In this embodiment, first, the variation pattern type is determined using a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2 '), and the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern determination random number (random 3'). Any one of the fluctuation patterns included in the fluctuation pattern type is determined. As such, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the features of the variation modes. For example, a plurality of change patterns are grouped by reach type, and a change pattern type including a change pattern with normal reach, a change pattern type including a change pattern with super reach A, and a change pattern with super reach B It may be divided into the variation pattern type. Also, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations in the pseudo sequence, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern not accompanied by a pseudo sequence, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, and It may be divided into a variation pattern type including two variation patterns and a variation pattern type including three variation patterns. Further, for example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns may be grouped by the presence or absence of an effect such as pseudo ream or slip effect.

  In this embodiment, as described later, in the case of a normal big hit or a probability variation big hit, normal CA3'-1 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and normal reach and pseudo ream It is classified into normal CA3'-2 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern, and super CA3'-3 which is a fluctuation pattern type accompanied by super reach. Also, in the case of sudden probability change big hit, the type is a special CA4'-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a non-reach fluctuation pattern and a special CA4'-2 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a reach It is divided. Moreover, when it is a small hit, it is classified into special CA4'-1 which is a fluctuation pattern classification including the fluctuation pattern of non-reach. Moreover, when it is out of position, it is non-reach CA2'-1 which is a change pattern type including the change pattern which does not have reach or a pseudo ream or slip rendition, and the fluctuation pattern which does not accompany reach but involves pseudo ream or slip rendition Non-reach CA2'-2 which is a variation pattern type including a non-reach CA2'-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of a shortening variation without reaching or pseudo reciprocation or sliding rendition, and a variation involving only normal reach Normal CA2'-4, which is a fluctuation pattern type including a pattern, normal CA2'-5, which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with normal reach and two re-interchanges, and one normal reach and one re-rotation A variation pattern type including variation patterns with reciprocity, normal CA 2'-6, and variation patters with super reach Are the type divided into a super CA2'-7 is a down type.

  In step S9023 in the game control process shown in FIG. 31, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a counter for generating a random number for determining the jackpot type of (1) and a random number for determining the normal symbol of (4). Perform count up (1 addition). That is, those are determination random numbers, and the other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2 ', random 3') or initial value random numbers (random 5 '). Note that random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Further, in this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware (which may be hardware outside the gaming control microcomputer 90560) built in the gaming control microcomputer 90560 is used as a jackpot determination random number. Note that software random numbers may be used instead of hardware random numbers as the jackpot determination random numbers.

  FIG. 34 (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a group of data stored in the ROM 9054 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R ′ is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state which is not a definite change state) and a probability change big hit determination table used in a positive change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 34 (A) is set in the normal time jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column in FIG. 34 (A) is set in the positive change time jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical values described in FIG. 34A are the jackpot determination values.

  FIGS. 34 (B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a group of data stored in the ROM 9054 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R ′ is set. In the small hit determination table, a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when performing variable display of the first special symbol, and a small hit determination table used when performing the variable display of the second special symbol (For the second special symbol) and there. Each numerical value described in FIG. 34 (B) is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), in FIG. 34 (C) Each numerical value described is set. Further, the numerical values described in FIGS. 34B and 34C are small hit judgment values.

  The small hit may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 34 (C) may not be provided. In this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed when the gaming state is shifted to the positive changing state. Even if the small hit occurs even when the gaming state is shifted to the positive changing state, and if it is configured to perform an effect asking whether or not to be the positive change, although the current playing state is the positive changing state Rather, it makes the player feel bothersome. Therefore, if small hits are not generated during the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits are less likely to be generated when the gaming state is a definite change state, and a turning effect for a definite change is not performed more than necessary. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 9053 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R '), but the big hit determination random number value is as shown in FIG. If it matches with any of the shown big hit judgment values, it decides to make it a big hit (normal big hit, definite variation big hit, sudden positive variation big hit which will be described later) regarding the special symbol. Further, when the jackpot determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 34 (B) and (C), it is decided to make the special symbol a small hit. The “probability” shown in FIG. 34A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 34B and 34C indicates the probability (percentage) of being a small hit. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a small hit is to decide whether or not to shift to a small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34 (B) and (C), when using the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), it is determined to be a small hit at a ratio of 1/300. In the case where the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, the case where it is determined to be a small hit at a rate of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 9013 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 9014 is start winning and the second special symbol is The percentage determined as "small hit" is higher than when variable display is performed.

  FIGS. 34D and 34E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 90131a and 90131b stored in the ROM 9054. Among these, FIG. 34 (D) determines the jackpot type using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 9013 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 90131a of the case. Further, FIG. 34E shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the retention memory based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening 9014 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 90131 b.

  The jackpot classification determination tables 90131a and 90131b "usually hit a jackpot classification" based on the random number (random 1 ') for jackpot classification determination when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a jackpot symbol. It is a table to be referred to in order to determine either "probable big hit" or "suddenly big hit". In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34 (D) and (E), eight judgment values are assigned to the "sudden probability change big hit" in the big hit type determination table 90131a (40 minutes Whereas in the big hit classification determination table 90131 b, 2 judgment values are assigned to the “suddenly probability change big hit” (a ratio of 2/40) The case where it is determined to be a definite big hit suddenly. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 9013 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 9014 is start winning and the second special symbol is As compared with the case where the variable display is performed, the rate at which the "sudden probability change big hit" is determined is high. "Suddenly probability variation big hit" is distributed only to the first special symbol big hit classification determination table 90131a, "suddenly probability variation big hit" is not distributed to the second special symbol big hit classification determination table 90131b (ie , And may be determined as "suddenly probability variation big hit" only when performing the variable display of the first special symbol).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34 (D) and (E), a sudden probability change big hit (two round big hit) as a first specified gaming state for providing a predetermined amount of game value, and the game There are cases where it is decided that the normal special hit and the probability change big hit (15 round big hit) as the second specific gaming state that grants the game value more than the value, and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed However, the game value to be awarded is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, as the gaming value to determine the second specific gaming state to increase the allowable number of winning number (count number) of gaming balls to the large winning opening per round It is also good. In addition, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state may be determined in which the opening time of the big winning opening per jackpot as a gaming value is increased as the gaming value. Also, for example, even if it is a big hit of the same 15 rounds, a first specific gaming state in which the large winning opening is opened once per round, and a second specific gaming state in which the large winning opening is opened multiple times per round The game value of the second specific gaming state may be enhanced by preparing and opening the number of times of opening of the special winning opening substantially. In this case, for example, in either the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, in the case of the first specific gaming state, all 15 rounds) In the case of the second specific gaming state, an undigested round is left), and an effect may be executed in such a manner as to ask whether or not the big hit continues further. Then, in the case of the first specific gaming state, the big hit game is ended since all 15 rounds are internally ended, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, internally undivided rounds remain Therefore, the big hit game may be continued (the effect that opening of the big winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after ending the big hit of 15 times open) may be performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34 (D) and (E), there are "normal big hit", "probably big hit" and "suddenly big hit" as the big hit types. In this embodiment, although the case where the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds is shown, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is shown in this embodiment. It is not limited to For example, a 7R probability variation big hit that controls 7 rounds of big hit games or a 5R probability variation big hit that controls 5 rounds of big hit games may be provided. Also, in this embodiment, there are three cases of the big hit type being “normal big hit”, “probably big hit” and “suddenly big hit”, but not limited to three types, for example, four or more types. A jackpot type may be provided. Also, conversely, the jackpot type may be less than three types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “normal big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to 15 rounds of big hit gaming state and shifted to a time saving state (high base state) after the end of the big hitting gaming state (see steps S90167 and 90168 described later). Then, after shifting to the time saving state, when the variable display is finished 100 times, the time saving state is finished (refer to steps S90168 and S90137 to 90140 described later). In this embodiment, after the transition to the time saving state, the time saving state ends even when a big hit occurs before the end of the execution of the variable display 100 times (see step S90132 described later).

  The "probably big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to 15 rounds of big hit gaming state and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, it is shifted to a high probability state) It is also shifted to the time saving state (high base state) (see steps S90169 and S90170 described later). Then, after shifting to the definite change state, the positive change state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S90132 described later).

  In addition, "suddenly positive variation big hit" is allowed up to the number of times the opening number of the big winning opening is smaller than "normal big hit" or "positive variation big hit" (in this embodiment, 2 times opening for 0.1 seconds) It is a big hit. That is, in the case of "a sudden odd change big hit", it is controlled to a big hit gaming state of two rounds. Also, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds in "normal big hit" and "probably big hit", while the opening time of big winning opening per round is "in sudden definite changing big hit" It is extremely short at 0.1 seconds, and it can hardly be expected that the game ball will win the big winning opening during the big hit game. And in this embodiment, after the termination of that sudden oddity big hit gaming state is transitioned to the definite change state (high probability state) (in this embodiment, it is shifted to the positive change state and in the short time state (high base state) (Refer to steps S90169 and S90170 described later). Then, after shifting to the definite change state, the positive change state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S90132 described later).

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of a "small hit", the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the big hit gaming state by "a sudden definite big hit" Similar control is performed. Then, in the case of "small hit", after the opening of the special winning opening is finished, the gaming state does not change, and the gaming state before the "small hit" is maintained. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to recognize whether the game is a sudden sudden big hit or a small hit, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The jackpot type judgment tables 90131a and 90131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of the random 1 ', and the judgment values corresponding to "normal big hit", "probably variable big hit", and "suddenly odd variable big hit" (big hit type determination Value) is set. When the value of the random 1 'matches any of the big hit type determination values, the CPU 9056 determines the type of the big hit as the type corresponding to the matched big hit type determination value.

  FIGS. 35A to 35C are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot variation pattern type determination table 90132A to 90132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination table 90132A to 90132C determines the variation pattern type according to the jackpot type determination result when it is determined that the variable display result is made the jackpot symbol, and the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination It is a table to be referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (random 2 ').

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 90132A to 90132C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 2 ') for variation pattern type determination, and normal CA3'-1 to normal CA3' A determination value corresponding to any of the variation pattern types of -2, super CA 3'-3, special CA 4'-1, and special CA 4'-2 is set.

  For example, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 90132A shown in FIG. 35A used when the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, and FIG. 35B used when the jackpot type is “probable variation jackpot”. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 90132B shown in FIG. 5, allocation of determination values to the variation pattern types of normal CA3'-1 to normal CA3'-2 and super CA3'-3 is different.

  As described above, when the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 90132A to 90132C selected according to the jackpot type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the jackpot type. In addition, determination values are assigned to different fluctuation pattern types according to the jackpot type. Therefore, different fluctuation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be made, and the ratio determined to be the same fluctuation pattern type can be made different.

  As shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B, in this embodiment, in the case of “normal big hit” or “probable variation big hit”, the random number (random 2 ′) of the variation pattern type determination If the value is 150 to 251, it can be seen that the variable display with at least Super Reach (Super Reach A, Super Reach B) is performed.

  Also, for the super reach jackpot, variation pattern types with pseudo-series (variation pattern types including variation patterns of super PA3'-3 and super PA3'-4) and variation pattern types without pseudo-series (super PB3'- 3 and the variation pattern type including the variation pattern of the super PB 3'-4). In this case, a variation pattern type with a super reach and a pseudo run, a super reach and a pseudo run, in both the big hit for the big hit variation pattern type determination table 90132A for normal hit and the big hit change pattern type decision table 90132B for the big variation A variation pattern type not to be accompanied is assigned.

  In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 90132C used when the jackpot type is "sudden probability variation big hit", for example, jackpot types such as special CA 4'-1 and special CA 4 '-2 are other than "sudden probability variation big hit" In some cases, the judgment value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern type to which the judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is suddenly controlled to the big hit state according to the big hit type being "suddenly odd change big hit", it is different from the case where the big hit state due to the big hit or positive hit is usually controlled. It can be determined as the variation pattern type.

  Further, FIG. 35D is an explanatory view showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 90132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 90132D, when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a small hit symbol, a plurality of variation pattern types, based on the random number (random 2 ') for variation pattern type determination It is a table referenced to decide on any of the types. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35 (D), in the case where it is determined to be a small hit, it is shown that special CA 4'-1 is determined as the variation pattern type. There is.

  36 (A) to 36 (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the release variation pattern type determination tables 90135A to 90135C. Among these, FIG. 36A shows a variation pattern type determination table for off-set 90135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. Further, FIG. 36B shows a variation pattern type determination table for off-set 90135B used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is three or more. Further, FIG. 36C shows a change pattern type determination table for off-set 90135C used when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state. When it is determined that the variable display result is to be a disappointing pattern, a plurality of variation pattern types are determined based on random numbers (random 2 ') for variation pattern type determination. It is a table referenced to decide on any of the types.

  Note that the example shown in FIG. 36 shows the case of using the separate variation pattern type determination tables 90135B to 90135C for the case where the gaming state is the probability change state or the time saving state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. However, it may be configured to use the common out-of-transition variation pattern type determination table in the case of the probability variation state or the time saving state and the case where the total number of pending storages is three or more. Further, although the example shown in FIG. 36C shows the case where the common fluctuation variation / classification variation pattern type determination table 90135C is used regardless of the total number of pending storages, it is for probability variation / time shortening As the variation pattern type determination table, a plurality of variation pattern determination tables for loss (depending on the ratio of determination values) according to the total number of pending storages may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the outset variation pattern type determination table 90135A used when the total number of pending storages is less than 3 and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more Although the case of using two types of tables of the out-of-order variation pattern type determination table 90135B used for the is shown, the way of dividing the out-of-range variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, separate outlier fluctuation pattern type determination tables may be provided for each value of the total number of pending storages (that is, for 0 total pending storage numbers, 1 total pending storage number, 2 total pending storage numbers) The outset fluctuation pattern type determination table may be used separately for the total number of pending storages of three, the total number of pending storages for four, and so on). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table may be used for the total pending storage number 0 to 2, the total pending storage number 3, and the total pending storage number 4.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of outlier fluctuation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of pending storages, but according to the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number, the outlier variation pattern type determination A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when performing variable display of the first special symbol, the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table separately prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number) Out of change variation pattern type judgment table for 0, 1 first pending storage number, 2 for 1st pending storage number, 3 for 1st pending storage number, 4 for 1st pending storage number, ... Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first number of pending storages may be used. For example, the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table may be used for the first pending storage number 0 to 2, for the first pending storage number 3, for the first pending storage number 4. Even in this case, when the first number of pending storages and the second number of pending storages are large (for example, 3 or more), the variation pattern type including the variation pattern having a short variation time may be easily selected. . In addition, even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern accompanied by super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  Note that the “specific effect mode” refers to a variation pattern type or variation pattern in which at least the expectation for a big hit is set high, such as a variation pattern with super reach, and the player can have a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is. In addition, “expected degree for big hit (reliability)” indicates the appearance rate (probability) that a big hit appears when variable display (for example, variable display with super reach) according to the specific effect mode is executed. ing. For example, the jackpot expectation when the variable indication with the super reach is performed is determined as (the ratio at which the super reach is performed when it is determined to be a big hit) / (when it is determined to be a big hit and as a loss) The rate at which the super reach is performed in both cases is calculated by calculating

  In each variation pattern type determination table for off-set 90135A to 90135B, numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the values of random numbers (random 2 ') for determination of variation pattern types Determination values corresponding to any of the variation pattern types of CA2'-3, normal CA2'-4 to normal CA2'-6, and super CA2'-7 are set.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 (A) and 36 (B), in this embodiment, when the game state is a normal state in this embodiment, the random number (random 2 ') of the variation pattern type determination is used. If the value is 230 to 251, it is understood that the variable display with at least the super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is performed regardless of the total number of pending storages.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B, in this embodiment, if the game state is normal and the game state is normal, a random pattern (random 2 ') for determining the variation pattern type is used. If the value is 1 to 79, it can be understood that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least not with the reach (without the effects such as the pseudo ream or the slip effect) regardless of the total number of pending storages. With such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (the variation pattern type determination table for loss 90135A, 90135B) is at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (the variation pattern with the reach). For some, regardless of the number of rights stored by the pending storage means (the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer) (the first pending storage number, the second pending storage number, the total pending storage number) A common judgment value (1 to 79 in the example shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B) is assigned. Note that “variable display patterns other than reach variable display patterns”, as described in this embodiment, for example, do not involve reach, do not accompany effects such as pseudo-trains or slip effects, and the variable display results It is a variable display pattern (variation pattern) used when it does not become a big hit.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, although the case of using the common jackpot variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state, whether the current gaming state is a definite change state The jackpot variation pattern type determination table separately prepared may be used depending on whether it is in the normal state. Further, in this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is three or more, the shortening fluctuation pattern is determined by selecting the shortening out-of-order fluctuation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 36 (B). Although a case is shown where there is a case, the total number of pending storages (the number of first pending storages or the number of second pending storages may be used when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state The threshold of) may be made different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, the total number of pending storages is three (or, for example, when the number of first pending storages and the number of second pending storages is two), for shortening By selecting the variation pattern type determination table for loss and making the variation pattern of the shortening variation determined in some cases, when the gaming state is a probability variation state or a time saving state, the total number of pending storages is smaller 1 or 2 Even in the case of (or, for example, even in the case of 0 or 1 where the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories are smaller), the variation pattern type determination table for loss for shortening is selected and the variation pattern of shortening variation is It may be determined.

  FIGS. 37A and 37B are explanatory diagrams showing the hit variation pattern determination tables 90137A to 90137B stored in the ROM 9054. FIG. When it is determined that the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit", the hit variation pattern determination tables 90137A to 90137B determine the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type, etc. The table is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types based on the random number (random 3 ') of Each of the variation pattern determination tables 90137A to 90137B is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, according to the determination result that the variation pattern type is to be any of normal CA3'-1 to normal CA3'-2 and super CA3'-3, hit variation pattern determination table 90137A is selected as the use table, and the variation pattern is selected. The hit variation pattern determination table 90137B is selected as the use table according to the determination result indicating that the type is one of the special CA4'-1 and the special CA4'-2. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 90137A to 90137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 3 ') for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and is the variable display result of the effect pattern Includes data (judgment value) corresponding to any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 37A, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only a normal reach and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a normal reach and a pseudo run as a variation pattern type Case of being classified into a normal CA3'-2 which is the case and a super CA3'-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a super reach (which may accompany a pseudo reach along with the super reach). ing. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37 (B), as the variation pattern type, a special CA 4'-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA 4 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach. The case where it is classified into '-2' is shown. In FIG. 37 (B), the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence or absence of a pseudo ream or a slip effect, instead of dividing the variation pattern type according to the presence or absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4'-1 is made to include the special PG 1'-1 and the special PG 2'-1 which are fluctuation patterns without pseudo ream or slip rendition, and the special CA 4'-2 is a pseudo ream or You may comprise so that special PG1'-2 with a slip production, special PG1'-3, and special PG2'-2 may be included.

  FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram of the out-of-out variation pattern determination table 90138A stored in the ROM 9054. As shown in FIG. Out of change variation pattern determination table 90138A is based on the variation pattern determination random number (random 3 ') according to the variation pattern type determination result when it is determined that the variable display result is to be "off". These are tables referred to in order to determine the fluctuation pattern as any one of a plurality of types. The out-of-out variation pattern determination table 90138A is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  39 and 40 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (a change pattern command for specifying a change pattern of an effect pattern that is variably displayed on effect display device 909 corresponding to a variable display of special symbols ) (Each corresponding to fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns which can be used shown in FIG. 32, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when the command 80XX (H) is received, the effect control microcomputer 90100 controls the effect display device 909 to start variable display of the effect pattern.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a small hit, and a type of big hit. Since the effect control microcomputer 90100 determines the display result of the effect pattern in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result specification commands.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation specification command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or a symbol variation specification command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or to start variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Upon receiving the symbol determination designation command, the effect control microcomputer 90100 ends the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise initialization designation is performed. Send a command

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for specifying a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A 001 to A 003 (H) are presentation control commands (big hit start designation commands: fan fare designation commands) for designating a start of the big hit game by displaying the fan fare screen. In this embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start 2 designation command, or a small hit / suspiciously definite variation jackpot start designation command is used. Specifically, the jackpot start 1 designation command (A001 (H)) is used in the “normal jackpot”, and the jackpot start 2 designation command (A002 (H)) is in the “normal jackpot”. In the case of "Suddenly Positive Variation Big Hit" or "Small Hit", the small hit / sudden positive variation big hit start specification command (A003 (H)) is used. The game control microcomputer 90560 is configured to transmit the fanfare designation command for the sudden variation big hit start designation suddenly when it is a big hit, but not to send the fan fare designation command when it is a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) showing a display of a number of times (round) of the special winning opening opening indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set to the EXT data and transmitted for the special winning opening open designation command, a different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round in the big hit game, the large winning opening opening designated command (A101 (H)) for specifying the round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round in the big hit game , A special winning opening opening specification command (A10A (H)) for specifying round 10 is transmitted. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening of the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted after the special winning opening open command, a different special winning opening after opening specification command is transmitted every round. For example, when the first round in the big hit game is ended, the designated special command (A 201 (H)) is sent after the opening of the big winning opening which designates the round 1, and the tenth round in the big hit game is ended. Is sent after the special winning opening opening specifying the round 10, a specification command (A30A (H)).

  The command A 301 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end 1 designated command: ending 1 designated command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, the end of the big hit game. The big hit end 1 specified command (A 301 (H)) is used when the big hit game by “normal big hit” is ended. The command A 302 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end 2 designated command: ending 2 designated command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, the end of the big hit game. Note that the big hit end 2 designated command (A 302 (H)) is used when the big hit game due to “probable variation big hit” is ended. The command A 303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden definite positive big hit end designation command: ending 3 specified command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden end of the big hit. The game control microcomputer 90560 is configured to transmit the ending designation command for the sudden change big hit termination specification suddenly in the case of the sudden change big hit, but not to send the ending specification command in the case of the small hit. It is also good.

  The command B 000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designating command) for specifying background display when the gaming state is the normal state. The command B 001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state background specifying command) for specifying a background display when the gaming state is the time saving state. The command B 002 (H) is an effect control command (probable change state background specification command) for specifying a background display when the gaming state is a definite change state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first pending storage number has increased by one. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number addition designation command) for specifying that the second pending storage number has increased by one. The command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first pending storage number has decreased by one. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second pending storage number has decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, as the pending storage information, an effect control command indicating that the number of pending storages has increased or decreased for the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number (the first pending storage number addition designation Although the case where the command and the second pending storage number addition designation command are transmitted is shown, the form of the pending storage information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, for example, the pending storage of the following aspect Information may be transmitted.

(1) Only one command is transmitted as pending storage information, and in that one command, which one of the first pending storage and the second pending storage has increased is specified, and the number of pending storages of the increased one (The first number of pending storages or the second number of pending storages) may be set and transmitted as EXT data.

(2) Only one command is transmitted as pending storage information, and which one of the first pending storage and the second pending storage has been specified in that one command, and the total pending storage count is EXT data May be set and transmitted.

(3) As pending storage information, which of the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 has been started (the first pending storage and the second pending storage have increased) is specified In addition to transmitting the effect control command (the first start winning specifying command, the second starting winning specifying command), the pending storage number specifying command for specifying the pending storage number is separately transmitted, and The total pending storage number may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(4) As pending storage information, which of the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 has been started (the first pending storage and the second pending storage have increased) is specified In addition to transmitting the effect control command (the first start winning specifying command, the second starting winning specifying command), the pending storage number specifying command for specifying the pending storage number is separately transmitted, and The increased number of pending storages (the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number) may be set and transmitted as EXT data.

  The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (determination result specification command at the time of winning) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Among them, the command C4XX (H) is the effect control command (design designation command) indicating whether or not it will be a big hit, whether it will be a small hit, or the type of the big hit among the judgment results when winning. is there. In addition, command C6XX (H) is the effect control command indicating the determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value range the random value for the variation pattern type determination is among the winning determination results. (Variable category command).

  In this embodiment, in the prize-time effect processing (see FIG. 48) to be described later (see FIG. 48), the gaming control microcomputer 90560 is a big hit or not, a small hit or not, a big hit type or not It is determined whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within the range of which determination value. Then, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for designating a type of a big hit is set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit it to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Further, a value designating the range of the determination value as the determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control is performed to transmit it to the effect control microcomputer 90100. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and the type of the big hit, and Based on the fluctuation category command, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined judgment value, the fluctuation pattern type can be recognized.

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory drawing showing an example of the content of a symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, the EXT data is set according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit, and the type of the big hit, and a symbol designation command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined in the winning-time effect processing described later that the “off” is to be made, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (design 1 designation command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Also, for example, when it is determined that “normal big hit” is to be made, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set to the EXT data. In addition, for example, when it is determined that "the probability variation big hit" will be, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 3 designation command) in which "02 (H)" is set to the EXT data. In addition, for example, when it is determined that "the sudden probability big hit", the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 4 designation command) in which "03 (H)" is set to the EXT data. Also, for example, when it is determined that "small hit" will be, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 5 designation command) in which "04 (H)" is set to the EXT data. The EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read out when setting the symbol specifying command and when setting the display result specifying command.

  42 and 43 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the change category command. As shown in FIG. 42 and FIG. 43, in this embodiment, which gaming state and which display result of the special symbol and the effect symbol are displayed, the random pattern determination random number at the start winning combination A value is set to the EXT data according to whether it is determined that the value of R falls within the range of any determination value, and the variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is normal and off at the start winning, the CPU 9056 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number will be 1 to 79 in step S90232 of the prize effect processing described later It is determined whether or not. When the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 9056 transmits a fluctuation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set to the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2'-1 is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Because of this, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type becomes non-reach CA2'-1 based on the receipt of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 89, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 90 to 99, the CPU 9056 transmits a fluctuation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 100 to 169, the CPU 9056 transmits a fluctuation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 170 to 199, the CPU 9056 transmits a fluctuation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 200 to 214, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 215 to 229, the CPU 9056 transmits a fluctuation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 230 to 251, the CPU 9056 transmits a fluctuation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set to the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2'-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination value 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Because of this, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA 2'-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  Specifically, thresholds 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 used to determine which of the above variation categories belongs to are shown in FIGS. 36 (A) and 36 (B). The values are derived by picking up values that can be the boundaries of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the out-of-plane variation pattern type determination table. The same applies to the subsequent variation categories 9 to 10 and 21 to 29, and they are assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 35 (A) to (D) and 36 (C). A threshold that is used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that may be a boundary of the range of the determined value.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state becomes a definite variation state, a short time state, and a break at the start winning, the CPU 9056 first determines that the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 in step S90232 It is determined whether or not .about.219. If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 2 19 (ie, if it becomes the variation pattern type of non-reach CA 2'-3), the CPU 9056 sets "08 (H)" to the EXT data. Send variation category 9 command. Next, the CPU 9056 sets “09 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 220 to 251 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2′-7). Send the variation category 10 command.

  Note that, even when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2'-7 may be allocated to the range of the determination value 230 to 251. By doing so, it is possible to assign a common determination value to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2′-7 regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, when performing the processing of step S90232 of the processing of the effect at the time of winning, which will be described later, if it is a loss, common determination processing may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. Further, in this case, the determination processing of the gaming state in step S 90226 can also be unnecessary.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that “normal big hit” is determined at the start winning, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes 1 to 74 in step S90232 of the prize effect processing described later Determine if If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 74 (that is, if it becomes the variation pattern type of normal CA 3'-1), the CPU 9056 sets the EXT data to "10 (H)". Send category 21 command. Next, the CPU 9056 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 75 to 149 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of normal CA 3'-2). Send the variation category 22 command. Next, the CPU 9056 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 150 to 251 (that is, it becomes the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA3′-3). Send the variation category 23 command.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that it becomes “probable big hit” at the start winning, the CPU 9056 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes 1 to 38 in step S90232 of the prize production processing described later. Determine if If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 38 (that is, if it is the variation pattern type of normal CA 3'-1), the CPU 9056 sets the EXT data to "13 (H)" Send category 24 commands. Next, the CPU 9056 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 39 to 79 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of normal CA 3'-2) Send the variation category 25 command. Next, the CPU 9056 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination is 80 to 251 (that is, when it becomes the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA3′-3) Send the variation category 26 command.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the start winning combination suddenly becomes a definite positive big hit, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes 1 to 100 in step S90232 of the winning presentation processing described later. Determine If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 100 (that is, if it becomes the variation pattern type of special CA 4'-1), the CPU 9056 sets the EXT data to "16 (H)" Send category 27 command. Next, the CPU 9056 sets “17 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 101 to 251 (that is, it becomes the variation pattern type of the special CA 4′-2). Send the variation category 28 command.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that a small hit will be made at the start winning combination, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set to the EXT data.

  It should be noted that since the total number of pending storages is not necessarily the same between when the winning determination is made at the start winning and when the variable display is actually started, the variation indicated by the winning determination result specification command It may also occur that the pattern type does not match the fluctuation pattern type actually used in the fluctuation display. However, in this embodiment, a common determination value is assigned to at least non-reach CA2'-1, super CA2'-7, and super CA3'-3 variation pattern types regardless of the total number of pending storages. (See FIG. 35 and FIG. 36), there is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display actually executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, a pre-reading advance notice effect which will be described later is executed on the fluctuation display determined to be a winning pattern when it becomes the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 2′-7 or the super CA 3 ′ -3. The variation category command shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 (specifically, variation category) is determined only when it is determined that the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2'-1, super CA2'-7 and super CA3'-3 is selected. One command, variation category 8 command, variation category 23 command, variation category 26 command (only) may be transmitted, and variation category commands may not be transmitted in the case of the winning determination result of the other variation pattern types. In addition, when it is determined at the time of winning that it is other than non-reach CA2'-1, super CA2'-7 and super CA3'-3, it transmits a fluctuation category command indicating that the fluctuation pattern type can not be specified. You may

  In this embodiment, when the start winning to the first start winning opening 9013 occurs when the time saving state (high base state), or during the big hit game the starting winning to the first start winning opening 9013 Except when it occurs (see steps S901215A and S901216A), the process of winning determination is executed each time a starting winning occurs, and the symbol designation command shown in FIG. 41 is transmitted and the variations shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 A category command is sent. Then, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes preview advance notice effect based on the received symbol designation command and variation category command.

  The effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90101) mounted on the effect control board 9080 receives the effect control command described above from the game control microcomputer 90560 mounted on the main board 9031. Then, the display state of the image display device 909 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 9070. Do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 designates the variation pattern of the rendering symbol each time the start display is made and the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that such a command form is an example, and another command form may be used. For example, a control command consisting of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used

  In addition, as a method of sending out the effect control command, the effect control command data is outputted from the main substrate 9031 to the effect control substrate 9080 via the relay substrate 9077 for each byte by eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) take-in signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing take-in of effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the effect control board 9080 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts the process of taking in 1-byte data by interrupt processing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed on the first special symbol display device 908a in response to the variation of the first special symbol. Image display that can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the production symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol in the symbol display 908b, and the image display that performs the presentation with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol When controlling the rendering components such as the device 909, it is possible not to increase the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560 to the performance control microcomputer 90100.

  44 and 45 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S9026) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main substrate 9031. As described above, in the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, if the first starting opening switch 9013a for detecting that the gaming ball has won in the first starting winning opening 9013 is on in the special symbol process processing, that is, starting to the first starting winning opening 9013 If there is a winning, the first start port switch passing process is executed (steps S90311 and S90312). In addition, if the second start opening switch 9014a for detecting that the game ball has won in the second start winning opening 9014 is on, that is, the CPU 9056 has a start winning in the second start winning opening 9014. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S90313 and S90314). Then, one of the processes in steps S90300 to S90310 is performed. If the first start winning hole switch 9013a or the second start hole switch 9014a is not turned on, one of the processes in steps S90300 to S90310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes of steps S90300 to S90310 are the following processes.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S90300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 90560 confirms the number of stored numerical data (total number of held memories) stored in the hold memory buffer. The storage number of the numerical data stored in the storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the combined holding memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is considered as a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S90301. The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game is over.

  Fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S90301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: time from the start of variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S90302.

  Display result designation command transmission processing (step S90302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S90303.

  Special symbol variation processing (step S90303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (when the fluctuation time timer set in step S90301 times out, ie, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the microcomputer 90100 for effect control is determined Control to transmit a designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S90304. Note that the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs control so that the fourth symbol is stopped in the effect display device 909 when the symbol determination designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560 is received.

  Special symbol stop processing (step S90304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. If the jackpot flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S90305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S90308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300. In this embodiment, the special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process, as will be described later, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4 will be described later. Data is set in the output buffer for special symbol display control data setting (see FIG. 56), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in the display control processing of step S9022 according to the setting contents of the output buffer.

  Special winning opening open processing (step S90305): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is five. In the special winning opening open processing, control is performed to open the special winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, while performing control which transmits the special winning a prize opening opening designated command to the microcomputer 90100 for production control, the execution time of the special winning a prize opening opening processing is set with the timer, internal state (special symbol process flag) step S90306 Update to the value corresponding to (6 in this example). The big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the big winning opening opening pre-processing is also processing for starting a big hit game. Further, since the special winning opening open designation command is transmitted with the value specifying the round set in the EXT data, the different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted every round. For example, when executing the first round in the big hit game, the large winning opening opening designated command (A101 (H)) for specifying the round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round in the big hit game , A special winning opening opening specification command (A10A (H)) for specifying round 10 is transmitted.

  Large winning opening open processing (step S90306): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special winning opening open processing, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S90305. In addition, while performing control which transmits the designated command after the opening in the big hit to the microcomputer 90100 for production control, when all rounds are finished, internal state (special symbol process flag) the value which corresponds to step S90307 (this value In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end processing (step S90307): It is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 90100 to perform display control to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, processing is performed to set a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time saving flag). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300.

  Small hit opening pre-processing (step S90308): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the special winning opening. Further, the execution time of the special winning opening open process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S90309. In addition, small hit opening pre-processing is executed for each opening of the big winning opening in the small hit game, but when starting the first open in the small hit game, the small hit opening pre-processing is the small hit game It is also a process to start.

  Small hit open processing (step S90309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is nine. Perform processing such as confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and the opening number of the special winning opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S90308. Update. In addition, when all opening is finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S90310.

  Small hit end processing (step S90310): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 90100 to perform display control to notify the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passing process of steps S90312 and S90314. Among these, FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the first starting opening switch passage process of step S90312. Further, FIG. 46 (B) is a flowchart showing the second starting opening switch passage process of step S90314.

  First, the first starting opening switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (A). In the first starting opening switch passage process executed when the first starting opening switch 9013a is in the on state, the CPU 9056 first determines whether the first number of pending storages has reached the upper limit value (specifically, 1) Check whether the value of the first pending storage number counter for counting the pending storage number is 4) (step S901211A). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increases the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S901212A) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S901213A). Next, the CPU 9056 extracts values from the random number circuit 9053 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 47B) (see FIG. Step S901214A). In the process of step S901214A, a hardware random number random R '(big hit determination random number), a software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1'), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2 ') And a random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3 ') is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random pattern determination random number (random 3 ') is not extracted in the first starting opening switch passage process (during start winning) and stored in advance in the storage area, but extracted at the start of the first special symbol fluctuation You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 may directly extract a value from a fluctuation pattern determination random number counter for generating a fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3 ') in the fluctuation pattern setting process described later. .

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of an area (pending storage buffer) for saving random numbers and the like corresponding to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 47, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first number of pending storages is secured in the first pending storage buffer. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer are hardware random numbers random R '(big hit determination random numbers) or software random numbers big hit type determination random numbers (random 1') The variation pattern type determination random number (random 2 ') and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3') are stored. The first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer are formed in the RAM 9055.

  Although this embodiment shows the case where random numbers such as the jackpot determination random numbers are stored in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer as hold storage, the predetermined information stored as the hold storage is It is not limited to random numbers. For example, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit may be determined in advance based on a big hit determination random number or the like, and the determination result may be stored as a pending storage in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer .

  Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the time-shortening flag indicating that the gaming state is the time-shortening state (high base state) is set (step S901215A). If it is set, the process directly proceeds to step S901220A. If the time saving flag is not set, the CPU 9056 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S901216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if it is the big hit gaming state or the small hitting gaming state), the CPU 9056 proceeds to step S901220A as it is.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the prize effect processing is executed to determine in advance the fluctuation display result and fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected start winning is subsequently executed (step) (step S901217A). Then, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the prize effect processing (step S901218A), and transmits the variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 Control is performed (step S901219A). In addition, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a first hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901220A).

  In this embodiment, the CPU 9056 always performs a start winning at the first start winning opening 9013 by executing the processing of steps S901218A and S901219A, and always performs symbol specification processing in step S901217A when performing winning processing. Both command and variation category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S901218A to S901220A is executed, the start winning on the first start winning opening 9013 occurs and the in-basket effect processing of step S901217A is executed. A set of three commands of a command, a variation category command, and a first pending storage count addition designation command is sent collectively in one timer interrupt.

  However, when the prize effect process of step S901217A is not executed because it is determined as Y in step S901215A or step S901216A, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit only the first pending storage number addition designation command in step S901220A. Control is not performed to transmit the determination result specifying command (design designation command, variation category command) at the time of winning. It should be noted that when the winning effect process of step S901217A is not executed, a value indicating the incompletion determination result can not be specified (for example, "FF (H)") is set as EXT data designated winning determination result A command (design designation command, variation category command) may be transmitted.

  Also, in this embodiment, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 9013 by executing the processing of step S901215A, only in the case where the gaming state is the low base state of step S901217A A prize effect process is executed. Moreover, in this embodiment, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 9013 by executing the processing of step S901216A, step S901217A is performed only when it is not the big hit gaming state or the small hitting gaming state. At the time of winning the effect processing is executed. It should be noted that the process may not shift to step S901217A only in the big hit gaming state, and may shift to step S901217A to execute the in-prize effect processing in the small hit gaming state.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is a control that the jackpot is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after being notified that the jackpot is started. It is a state until it is notified that the opening of the big winning opening of the final round is finished and the end of the big hit is notified. Specifically, processing from the big winning opening opening pre-processing (see step S90305) to the big hit end processing (see step S90307) in the special symbol process processing is being executed.

  Next, the second starting opening switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (B). In the second starting opening switch passage process executed when the second starting opening switch 9014a is in the on state, the CPU 9056 determines whether the number of the second holding memories has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second holding) Whether or not the value of the second pending storage number counter for counting the storage number is 4) is confirmed (step S901211B). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increases the value of the second pending storage number counter by 1 (step S901212B) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S901213B). Next, the CPU 9056 extracts the values from the random number circuit 9053 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 47B) (see FIG. Step S901214 B). In the process of step S901214B, a hardware random number random R '(big hit determination random number), a software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1'), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2 ') And a random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3 ') is extracted and stored in the storage area. In addition, it does not extract the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 3 ') in the 2nd starting opening switch passage processing (at the time of starting winning combination) and store in advance in the storage area, it is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 may directly extract a value from a fluctuation pattern determination random number counter for generating a fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3 ') in the fluctuation pattern setting process described later. .

  Next, the CPU 9056 executes a prize effect process (step S901217B). Then, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (step S901218B), and transmits the variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 Control is performed (step S901219B). Further, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a second storage reserve number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901220B).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S901218B and S901219B, the CPU 9056 is always required to designate a symbol every time the second start winning opening 9014 is start-up winning and the winning-time effect processing of step S901217B is executed. Both command and variation category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the start winning to the second start winning opening 9014 is generated by executing the processing of steps S901218B to S901220B and the winning at presentation processing of step S901217B is executed, the symbol designation is performed. A set of three commands of a command, a variation category command, and a second pending storage count addition designation command is sent collectively in one timer interrupt.

  Also in the second starting opening switch passage process, the same process as step S901215A may be performed, and if the time saving state is selected, the effect process at the time of winning in step S901217B may not be executed. That is, only when it is the normal state (low base state), the winning a prize effect process of step S901217B may be executed to transmit the symbol designating command and the variation category command.

  Further, also in the second starting opening switch passing process, the same process as step S901216A may be performed, and if a big hit game is being performed, the effect processing at the time of winning in step S901217B may not be executed. In addition, in the second starting mouth switch passing processing, it is possible not to execute the winning a prize production processing of step S901217B (that is, it is possible not to execute the winning a prize determination processing for the second special symbol) .

  FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing a winning effect presentation process of steps S901217A and S901217B. In the prize-time effect process, the CPU 9056 first compares the jackpot determination random numbers (random R ') extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B with the normal jackpot determination values shown in the left column of FIG. Are checked to see if they match (step S90220). In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing, which will be described later, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, the big hit type or the variation pattern setting processing However, before the variable display based on the start winning is started at the timing when the gaming ball starts winning in the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014. It is confirmed in advance whether or not a big hit or a small hit, the type of the big hit, and the value of the variation pattern type determination random number fall within the range of any judgment value by executing the winning presentation process. By doing so, the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type are predicted in advance before the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is executed, and as described later, the advance notice is performed based on the judgment result at the time of winning. Do.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R ') does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step S90220), the CPU 9056 sets a probability variation flag indicating that the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability state) It is checked whether it is set (step S90221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 9056 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R ') extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B with the jackpot determination value at the probability change shown in the right column of FIG. It is confirmed whether they match (step S90222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variable displays will be performed from when it is confirmed in step S90221 at the start winning combination whether or not the variable display based on the starting winning combination is actually started. There is. Therefore, the game state changes (for example, the change start) until the variable display based on the start change is actually started after it is confirmed in step S90221 whether the start change is a definite change state or not. In the case where a definite big hit or a sudden positive big hit has occurred before, it changes from the normal state to the positive change state. Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S90221 at the start winning combination and the gaming state determined at the start of fluctuation (see step S9061 described later) do not necessarily coincide with each other. In addition, in order to prevent such non-coincidence, a game with a change of gaming state in the currently stored holding memory is specified, and determination at the time of starting winning is performed based on the gaming state after the change. It is also good.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R ') does not match the big hit determination value at the time of definite variation (N in step S90222), the CPU 9056 selects the big hit determination random number (random R') extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B. The small hit determination values shown in (B) and (C) are compared, and it is confirmed whether or not they match (step S90223). In this case, when the CPU 9056 receives the start winning for the first start winning opening 9013 (when the winning at presentation processing in step S901217A is executed), the small hit determination table (first one shown in FIG. 34B) It is determined whether it matches with the small hit judgment value set in (for special symbol). In addition, when there is a start winning to the second start winning opening 9014 (when performing the winning processing at step S901217B), a small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 34 (C) It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R ') does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S90223), the CPU 9056 sets the EXT data "00 (H)" indicating that it becomes "off" to the symbol designation command A process of setting is performed (step S90224).

  Next, the CPU 9056 performs processing to determine the current gaming state (step S90225). In this embodiment, in step S90225, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state and whether or not the time saving state is set (specifically, whether a positive change flag or a time saving flag is set) Determine In addition, after confirming whether or not the vehicle is in the definite variation state and the time saving state in step S90225 at the start winning combination, a plurality of variable displays are started until the variable display based on the starting winning combination is actually started. Variable display may be performed. Therefore, the game state changes in the period from when it is confirmed in step S90225 whether or not it is a definite change state and the time saving state at the start winning combination, and until the variable display based on the starting winning combination is actually started (For example, when a definite big hit or a sudden positive big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation, it may change from the normal state to the positive change state). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S90225 at the start winning combination and the gaming state determined at the start of fluctuation (see step S9061 described later) do not necessarily coincide with each other. In addition, in order to prevent such non-coincidence, a game with a change of gaming state in the currently stored holding memory is specified, and determination at the time of starting winning is performed based on the gaming state after the change. It is also good.

  Then, the CPU 9056 sets each threshold for removal in accordance with the determination result of step S90225 (step S90226). In this embodiment, a threshold value determination program for performing threshold value determination in advance is incorporated, and the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within any determination value range by determining whether it is larger than the threshold value Is determined, and the value of the EXT data to be set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 is determined.

  For example, the CPU 9056 sets the threshold value 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is the definite change state or the time saving state. In this case, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold 219 in step S90232 described later, and the value is less than or equal to the threshold 219 (ie, when it is 1 to 219). Determines that “08 (H)” is set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 42). If the threshold value is not 219 or less (ie, if it is 220 to 251), it is determined that "09 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 42).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 9056 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU sets the thresholds 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold 79 in step S90232 described later, and the value is less than or equal to the threshold 79 (ie, 1 to 79). Determines that “00 (H)” is set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 42). When the threshold value is equal to or less than 89 (that is, 80 to 89), it is determined that "01 (H)" is set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 42). When the threshold is 99 or less (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 42). When the threshold is 169 or less (ie, 100 to 169), it is determined that "03 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 42). When the threshold is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 42). If the threshold is equal to or less than the threshold 214 (i.e., 200 to 214), it is determined that "05 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 42). If the threshold value is 229 or less (ie, if it is 215 to 229), it is determined that "06 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 42). If the threshold value is not 229 or less (ie, if it is 230 to 251), it is determined that “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 42).

  In the example of threshold determination shown above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in ascending order of threshold value, so the one determined in the later order threshold is used. It does not fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after it is determined whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when it is determined whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 or less of the threshold value of the previous order. It is determined whether or not it is in the range of Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown where determination is made as 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 in ascending order of threshold value, but conversely, 229, 214, in ascending order of threshold value. It may be determined as 199, 169, 99, 89 and 79. The same applies to the case of performing determination using other threshold values described below.

  Note that the threshold in the normal state (low probability / low base state) may be always set without performing the determination of the gaming state in step S90225. Even with such a configuration, since the range of the determination value is common to at least the variation pattern types that cause "super reach", it is determined whether or not "super reach". be able to.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R ') matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S90223), the CPU 9056 designates the symbol "04 (H)" to indicate "small hit" as a symbol A process of setting a command is performed (step S90227).

  Next, the CPU 9056 sets a small hit threshold (step S90228). In this embodiment, the CPU 9056 sets the threshold 251, and determines that the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 251 (which is 1 to 251) in step S90232 described later. It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 43). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined to set the EXT data “18 (H)” as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R ') matches the jackpot determination value in step S90220 or step S90222, the CPU 9056 performs a big hit based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1') extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B. The type of is determined (step S90229). In this case, when the CPU 9056 receives a start winning for the first start winning opening 9013 (when the in-winning effect processing in step S901217A is executed), the big hit type determination table (first) shown in FIG. Using the special symbol) 90131a, it is determined whether the jackpot type is "normal big hit", "probably big hit" or "suddenly big hit". In addition, when there is a start winning to the second start winning opening 9014 (when performing the winning processing process of step S901217B), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 34 (E) Using 90131 b, it is determined whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit”.

  Next, the CPU 9056 performs processing for setting EXT data according to the determination result of the big hit type as a symbol designation command (step S90230). In this case, when it is determined that “normal big hit” is to be performed, the CPU 9056 performs processing for setting EXT data “01 (H)” indicating that “normal big hit” is to be made to the symbol designation command. Further, when it is determined that the "probable variation big hit" is to be performed, the CPU 9056 performs processing of setting EXT data "02 (H)" indicating that the "probability variation big hit" is to be made to the symbol designating command. Also, when it is determined that "suddenly a probability change big hit" will be made, the CPU 9056 performs processing of setting EXT data "03 (H)" indicating that it becomes a "sudden probability change big hit" as a symbol designation command.

  Then, the CPU 9056 sets each big hit threshold according to the big hit type determined in step S 90229 (step S 90231).

  For example, the CPU 9056 sets the thresholds 74 and 149 when it determines that “normal big hit”. In this case, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 74 in step S90232 described later, and the value is equal to or less than the threshold 74 (ie, 1 to 74). Determines that “10 (H)” is to be set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 43). When the threshold is 149 or less (ie, 75 to 149), it is determined that "11 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 43). If the threshold value is not 149 or less (that is, if it is 150 to 251), it is determined that "12 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 43).

  In addition, for example, when the CPU 9056 determines that the “probable big hit” is to be made, it sets the threshold values 38 and 79. In this case, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold 38 in step S90232 described later, and the value is less than or equal to the threshold 38 (ie, 1 to 38). Determines that “13 (H)” is set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 43). When the threshold is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that “14 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 43). When the threshold is not 79 or less (ie, 80 to 251), it is determined that "15 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 43).

  Also, for example, when the CPU 9056 determines that “a sudden odd change big hit”, the threshold value 100 is set. In this case, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold 100 in step S90232 described later. Determines that “16 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 43). If the threshold value is not 100 or less (ie, if it is 101 to 251), it is determined that "17 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 43).

  Next, the CPU 9056 uses the thresholds set in steps S90226, S90228, and S90231, and the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination (random 2 ') extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B to determine which value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type judgment It is determined whether the range of the determination value is satisfied (step S90232).

  In steps S90226, S90228, and S90231, the variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 35 and 36) is set instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, and the variation pattern type set in step S90232 The range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number or any variation pattern type may be determined using the determination table.

  Then, the CPU 9056 performs processing for setting EXT data according to the determination result as a fluctuation category command (step S90233). Specifically, the CPU 9056 selects one of “00 (H)” to “0 B (H)”, “10 B (H)”, and “10 B (H)” as shown in FIGS. (H) “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command.

  In this embodiment, even when it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is determined in the winning determination, it is uniformly determined whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within which range. If it is determined that a big hit or a small hit will be made, the range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number may not be determined. Then, a symbol designating command indicating that it is determined that the winning is determined to be a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted, and a variation category command indicating comprehensively a variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . Then, for example, although the effect control microcomputer 90100 does not specifically indicate to which fluctuation pattern type it is not indicated, it is indicated that the fluctuation pattern type comprehensively indicates any of the big hit fluctuation patterns On the basis of the reception of the category command, a pre-reading notice effect to be described later may be executed.

  49 and 50 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S90300) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 9056 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step S9051). Specifically, it checks the count value of the combined pending storage number counter. If the total number of pending storages is 0, the CPU 9056 checks whether 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was executed if the customer waiting demo specification command has not been sent yet (step S9051A). Note that whether 30 seconds have elapsed since the end of the last variation display is performed, for example, when it is first determined as Y in step S9051, a value corresponding to 30 seconds is set in a predetermined timer, It can be determined by confirming whether the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have elapsed, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a customer waiting demo specification command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S9051B), and ends the process. For example, when the CPU 9056 transmits the customer waiting demo specification command in step S9051B, the CPU 9056 sets a customer waiting demonstration specification command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration specification command has been transmitted. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption after transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command, the customer waiting demonstration instruction command completed flag is set and the customer waiting is repeated. Control may be performed so as not to send a demo specification command. Also, in this case, the customer waiting demo specification command transmitted flag may be reset when the next time the variable display of the special symbol is started. Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted 30 seconds after the end of the last variation display executed, and the customer waiting demonstration display is started. For example, the customer waiting demonstration display may be started after one minute, for example.

  If the total number of pending storages is not 0, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the second pending storage number is 0 (step S9052). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the second pending storage number counter is 0 or not. If the second pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 9056 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol) The data which shows "the 2nd" is set to (step S9053). If the second pending storage number is 0 (ie, only the first pending storage number has been accumulated), the CPU 9066 sets data representing "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S9054).

  In this embodiment, the processing of steps S9052 to S9054 is executed, whereby the variable display of the second special symbol is executed preferentially to the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variation display of the second special symbol is controlled to be established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variation display of the first special symbol.

  In addition, when it is comprised so that priority is given and the fluctuation display of the 2nd special symbol is performed as shown in this embodiment, in the winning a prize processing process shown in FIG. Only the process of comparing the value of L with the jackpot determination value in the low probability state may be executed, and the comparison with the jackpot determination value in the positive change state (high probability state) may not be performed (specifically, step S90220 Only the processing of step S90221 and step S90222 may be omitted. With such a configuration, when the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority, it is between the determination result of the big hit in the winning determination and the determination result of the big hit at the start of the actual change. Deviation can be prevented from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 9056 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number of one indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 9055 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055 (step S9055). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 is a random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. Are read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the CPU 9056 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055.

  Then, the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S9056). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and in the pending specific area and the first pending storage buffer Shift the contents of each storage area. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of the respective saving areas in the pending specific area and the second pending storage buffer are shifted. Do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 is in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 9055. The stored random number values are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 9055 The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n-1. In addition, the CPU 9056 adds up the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total reserved storage number = m (m = 2 to 8) in the storage specific area. It stores in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storages = m-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first pending storage numbers (or the respective second pending storage numbers) are extracted is always the first pending storage number (or It agrees with the order of the 2nd pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, and 4. Further, the order in which the respective values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1 to 8.

  Then, the CPU 9056 decreases the value of the total number of pending storages by one. In other words, the count value of the total hold storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step S9058). Note that the CPU 9056 saves the value of the combined pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 9055.

  Also, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 according to the current gaming state (step S9060). In this case, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a definite change state background designation command when a positive change flag indicating that the change is in the positive change state is set. Also, the CPU 9056 sets only the time-shortening flag indicating that the time-shortening state is set, and performs control to transmit a time-shortening state background designation command when the probability change flag is not set. Further, the CPU 9056 performs control of transmitting a normal state background designation command if neither the positive variation flag nor the short time flag is set.

  Specifically, when the CPU 9056 transmits the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 90100, the address of the command transmission table (previously set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command is used. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set to the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S9028). In this embodiment, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, the pending storage number subtraction designated command (the first pending storage number subtraction) for each timer interrupt It is transmitted to the microcomputer for effect control 90100 in the order of the designation command or the second reserve storage number subtraction designation command). Specifically, when starting the variation of the special symbol, first, the background designation command is sent, the variation pattern command is sent after 4 ms, the display result designation command is sent after 4 ms, and after 4 ms, A pending storage number subtraction designation command (a first pending storage number subtraction designation command or a second pending storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted. In addition, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the symbol variation specification command (1st symbol variation specification command, 2nd symbol variation specification command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation specification command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

  In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating the “first” indicating that the processing is executed targeting the first start winning opening 9013, that is, the processing indicating that the processing is executed targeting the first special symbol Data indicating "" or data indicating "second" indicating execution of processing for the second start winning opening 9014, that is, "second" indicating execution of processing for the second special symbol Data is set to the special symbol pointer. And in subsequent processing in special symbol process processing, processing according to data set to a special symbol pointer is performed. Therefore, the processing of steps S90300 to S90310 can be made common to the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 9056 reads out the random R ′ (big hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area, and executes the big hit determination module. In this case, the CPU 9056 is for the jackpot determination extracted in step S901214A of the first start port switch passing process and step S901214B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer. Read the random number and make a big hit judgment. The big hit judgment module compares a predetermined big hit judgment value or small hit judgment value (see FIG. 34) with the big hit judgment random number, and executes processing to decide to make a big hit or a small hit if they match. Is a program that That is, it is a program that executes the process of the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

  In the process of the big hit determination, when the gaming state is a definite change state, the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than in the non-probable change state (normal state). Specifically, the probability variation time big hit determination table (the table in the ROM 9054 in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 34 (A) is set) in which the number of big hit determination values is set in advance is large A normal-time big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 34A in the ROM 9054 is set) is provided, which is set smaller than the time big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state, and when the gaming state is a definite change state, processing of the determination of the big hit using the big change determination table at the positive change time, the gaming state is normal When it is in the state, processing of the determination of the big hit is performed using the big hit determination table at the normal time. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R ') matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 34A, the CPU 9056 determines to set the jackpot for the special symbol. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S9061), the process proceeds to step S9071. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to decide whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol display as a big hit symbol or not It is also.

  In addition, confirmation of whether the present game state is a definite change state is performed by whether the positive change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when shifting the gaming state to the probability change state, and is reset when ending the probability change state. Specifically, it is determined to be “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit” and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. And, after the big hit game end, it is reset when the next big hit occurs.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R ') does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S9061), the CPU 9056 checks the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 34B and 34C). Use it to process small hits. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R ') matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 34 (B) and (C), the CPU 9056 determines that the special symbol is to be a small hit. . In this case, the CPU 9056 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 34B) Use) to decide whether to make a small hit or not. In addition, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", it is determined whether or not the small hit is made using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 34 (C). . Then, if it is determined to be a small hit (step S9062), the CPU 9056 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S9063), and proceeds to step S9075.

  If the value of the random R ′ does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S9062), that is, if it is a loss, the process directly proceeds to step S9075.

  In step S9071, the CPU 9056 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the big hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the big hit type to any one of a plurality of types (step S9072). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 selects the jackpot type determination table 90131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 34 (D). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates the “second”, the CPU 9056 selects the big hit type determination table 90131 b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 34 (E).

  Next, using the selected jackpot type determination table, the CPU 9056 uses the type ("normal jackpot") corresponding to the value matching the value of the random number (random 1 ') for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area. A definite variation big hit "or" suddenly definite variation big hit "is determined as the type of big hit (step S9073). In this case, the CPU 9056 determines the big hit type which is extracted in step S901214A of the first start port switch passing process and step S901214B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer. Read the random number and decide the big hit type. Moreover, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 34 (D) and (E), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Suddenly, the probability that a big hit is selected is high.

  The CPU 9056 also sets data indicating the determined type of big hit in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 9055 (step S 9074). For example, when the big hit type is "normal big hit", "01" is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "probable variation big hit", "02" is set as data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is "suddenly, there is a definite variation big hit", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 9056 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S 9075). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is an out pattern is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, according to the decision result of the big hit type, it decides the stop symbol of the special symbol which one of “1”, “3”, “7”, “9” which becomes the big hit symbol Do. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be "suddenly positive variation big hit", "1" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol, and when "big hit" is determined, the "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol And, when it is decided to be "probable variation big hit", "7" is decided to be the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the big hit type is determined first, and the case of determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is shown, but the method of determining the big hit type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is It is not limited to what has been shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which the stop symbol of the special symbol and the big hit type are associated in advance is prepared, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is first determined based on the big hit type determination random number, the corresponding big hit based on the determination result The type may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S90301) (step S9076).

  FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S90301) in the special symbol process processing. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S9091). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 9056 uses the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 90132A to 90132C (FIG. 35 (A ) To (C)) is selected (step S9092). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

  If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 9056 checks whether the small hit flag is set or not (step S9093). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 90132D (FIG. 35D (FIG. 35D) as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. ) Is selected (step S9094). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

  If the small hit flag is not set either, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the time short flag indicating that the time short state is set (step S 9095). In this embodiment, the time-shortening flag is set when transitioning to the time saving state at the end of the big hit game based on the big hit normally, and is also shifted to the definite changing state at the end of the big hit game based on the probability change big hit The time saving flag is set because it is also transferred. Therefore, when it is determined as Y in step S9095, it is controlled to be in a time-saving state together with the probability changing state after the end of the big hit game based on the probability big hit, in addition to the time being controlled only after the big hit game based on the big hit. There are times when

  If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S9095), that is, if the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 9056 checks whether the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (step S9096). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S 9096), the CPU 9056 is used as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. 36A is selected (step S9097). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

  If the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S 9096), the CPU 9056 uses the variation pattern type determination table for loss as a table used to determine the type of variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types. 90135B (see FIG. 36B) is selected (step S9098). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

  If the time saving flag is set (Y in step S9095), that is, if the gaming state is a definite change state or a time reduction state, the CPU 9056 determines the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types As a table to be used, a release variation pattern type determination table 90135C (see FIG. 36C) is selected (step S9099). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is normal and the total number of pending storages is three or more by executing the processing of steps S9095 to S9099, the variation for disconnection shown in FIG. 36 (B). Pattern type determination table 90135 B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, a variation pattern type determination table for off-set 90135C shown in FIG. 36C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2'-3 may be determined as the change pattern type in the process of step S90100 described later, and when the change pattern type of non-reach CA2'-3 is determined, the process of step S90102 The non-reach PA1'-2 of the shortening variation is determined as the variation pattern in (see FIG. 38). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, or when the total number of pending storages is three or more, the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation may be performed. In this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (see FIG. 36C) used in a probability variation state or a short time state and a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved memories (see FIG. Although the case where it is a table different from 36 (B) is shown, a common table may be used as a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, the total number of pending storages is almost 0 (for example, 0 or 0 or 1). May not perform the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation. In this case, for example, when the CPU 9056 determines “Y” in step S9095, the CPU 9056 confirms whether the total number of pending storages is approximately 0 or not, and if the total number of pending storages is approximately 0, the variation pattern type for loss The determination table 90135A (see FIG. 36A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 9056 reads out random 2 '(random pattern type determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer), and selects it in the processing of steps S9092, S9094, S9097, S9098 or S9099. The variation pattern type is determined to be any one of a plurality of types by referring to the table (step S90100).

  Next, the CPU 9056 uses the hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 90137A and 90137B (see FIG. 37) as a table used to determine one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on the fluctuation pattern type determination result of step S90100. And the out-of-out variation pattern determination table 90138A (see FIG. 38) are selected (step S90101). Also, the random 3 '(random number for fluctuation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and variation is performed by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S90101. The pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S90102). In addition, when it is comprised so that random 3 '(random number for fluctuation pattern determination) may not be extracted at the timing of starting winning a prize, CPU 9056 is for fluctuation pattern judgment for producing | generating the random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3'). The value may be directly extracted from the random number counter, and the variation pattern may be determined based on the extracted random value.

  Next, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command of the special symbol pointer indicated one to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation specification command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation specification command. Further, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the effect control command (the change pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90104).

  Next, the CPU 9056 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern to the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 9055 (step S90105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S90302) (step S90106).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, it may be determined first whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination, instead of suddenly determining the type of change pattern. Then, based on the determination result of whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S9095 to S90100 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, the non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination table (including the non-reach CA2'-1 to non-reach CA2'-3 fluctuation pattern types shown in FIG. 36) and the reach fluctuation pattern type determination table (in advance) A variation pattern type of normal CA2'-4 to normal CA2'-6 and super CA2'-7 shown in FIG. 36) is prepared, and any variation pattern type determination is made based on the reach determination result. The table may be selected to determine the variation pattern type.

  Further, when it is determined whether or not reach is determined by lottery processing using random numbers for reach determination, the number of reach may be determined according to the total number of pending storages (which may be the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number). A reach determination table with different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not the reach probability is lowered as the number of pending storage increases. In this case, whether the CPU 9056 matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table, for example, in the determination of whether or not “super reach out” or “non-reach out” is in the prize effect processing Whether or not to reach may be determined in advance by determining whether or not it is reached. In addition, in view of the fact that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, “super reach deviates” according to the fluctuation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the reach determination random number. It is preferable to configure in advance to determine whether or not to be "non-reach out" and to perform preview advance notice effects.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the display result designation command transmission process (step S90302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 9056 transmits one of the effect control command (see FIG. 39) of the display result 1 specification to the display result 5 specification according to the determined type, small hit, or removal of the determined big hit. Control to Specifically, the CPU 9056 first confirms whether the big hit flag is set (step S90110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S90116. When the big hit flag is set, when the type of big hit is “normal big hit”, control to transmit the display result 2 designated command is performed (steps S90111 and S90112). In addition, it can be determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S 9074 of the special symbol normal processing is “01” specifically, whether it is “normal big hit” or not . Further, when the type of the big hit is “probable variation big hit”, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S90113, S90114). In addition, it can be determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S9074 of the special symbol normal processing is "02", specifically, whether it is a "probable big hit" or not. . If neither the “normal big hit” nor the “probable big hit” (ie, it is “suddenly big hit”), the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command (step S90115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S90110), the CPU 9056 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S90116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (step S90117). If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S90116), that is, if it is not, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S90118).

  Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S90303) (step S90119).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation in progress processing (step S90303) in the special symbol process processing. In special symbol variation processing, CPU 9056 first confirms whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command (first pending storage number subtraction designation command or second pending storage number subtraction designation command) has already been sent ( Step S901121). Note that whether or not the pending storage count subtraction specification command has already been transmitted indicates, for example, that the pending storage count subtraction specification command has been sent when sending the pending storage count subtraction specification command in step S901122 described later. The storage number subtraction specification command transmission completion flag may be set, and it may be checked in step S901121 whether the pending storage number subtraction specification command transmission completion flag is set. Also, in this case, the set storage number subtraction designated command transmitted flag is reset by the special symbol stop processing or the big hit end processing described later when the variation display of the special symbol is finished or the big hit is finished. Just do it.

  Next, if the pending storage number subtraction designation command has not been sent, the CPU 9056 performs control to send the pending storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901122). In this case, when the value indicating “first” is set to the special symbol pointer, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the first storage reserve number subtraction designation command. When the special symbol pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a second storage reserve number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S901125), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step S901126), performs control to transmit a symbol determination specification command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901127). Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S90304) (step S901128). If the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing (step S90304) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S90131). If the jackpot flag is set, if it is set, the CPU 9056 is a probability change flag indicating that it is a definite change state, a short time flag that indicates that it is a short time state, and the number of times the special symbol can be changed Is reset (step S90132), and control is performed to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90133). Specifically, when the type of the jackpot is “normal jackpot”, the jackpot start 1 designation command (command A 001 (H)) is transmitted. Also, when the type of the big hit is “probable variation big hit”, the big hit start 2 specification command (command A 002 (H)) is transmitted. Also, when the type of the big hit is a sudden definite big hit, a small hit / sudden positive big hit start specification command (command A 003 (H)) is transmitted. In addition, data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 9055 (data stored in the big hit type buffer) whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit” It is determined based on

  Further, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that a big hit has occurred in the effect display device 909) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S90134). In addition, the number of opening times (for example, 15 times in the case of "normal big hit" or "probably big hit". 2 times in "suddenly big hit") is set in the special winning opening open number counter (step S90135) . In addition, round time per round in the big hit game is also set. Specifically, in the case of a sudden odd change big hit, 0.1 second is set as a round time, and in the case of a normal big hit or a positive change big hit, 29 seconds is set as a round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S90305) (step S90136).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S90131, the CPU 9056 confirms whether the value of the hour counting counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be varied in the time saving state is 0 (step S90137). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 9056 decrements the value of the time saving number counter by 1 (step S90138). Then, when the value of the time reduction number counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S90139), the CPU 9056 resets the time reduction flag (step S90140).

  Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S90141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 transmits a small hit / suspiciously positive change big hit start designation command (command A 003 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90142). Further, the small hit display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the small hit has occurred in the effect display device 909) (step S90143). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, twice) is set in the special winning opening open number counter (step S90144). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hitting start pre-processing (step S90308) (step S90145).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S90141), the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S90300) (step S90146).

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S90307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S90160), and when the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S90164. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S90161), and control to transmit a big hit end designation command is performed (step S90162). Here, when it is "normal big hit", the big hit end 1 specification command (command A 301 (H)) is transmitted, and when it is "probable variation big hit", the big hit end 2 specification command (command A 302 (H) And, if it is "Suddenly Certainly Big Variation Big Hit", the small hit / suddenly big variation big hit end specification command (command A 303 (H)) is sent. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the image display device 909 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S90163), and the process is ended.

  In step S90164, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by one. Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S90165). If it has not, the process is ended.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S90165), the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit game to be finished this time is based on a normal big hit (step S90166). In addition, whether or not it is a case to end the big hit game based on the normal big hit, specifically, whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S 9074 of the special symbol normal processing is "01" or not It can judge by confirming. If the big hit game based on the normal big hit is to be ended (Y in step S90166), the CPU 9056 sets the time saving flag to shift the gaming state to the time saving state (step S90167). Further, the CPU 9056 sets a predetermined number of times (100 in this example) in the time saving number counter (step S90168).

  The CPU 9056 sets the definite change flag and changes the gaming state into the definite state unless the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit normally (ie, the end of the big hit game based on the definite variation big hit or sudden definite variation big hit). At the same time as transition is made (step S90169), the time saving flag is set to shift the gaming state to the time saving state (step S90170).

  Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S90300) (step S90171).

  In this embodiment, when the above process is executed, control is also performed to the short time state when controlled to the probability change state, so the normal state (low probability / low base state) as the gaming state ), There are three states: short time state (low probability / high base state), and probability change state (high probability / high base state).

  FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing (step S9032) executed by the gaming control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main substrate 9031. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 or not (step S903201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 9056 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol variation display for the special symbol display control data setting. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S903202). In this case, the CPU 9056 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the changing speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 each time 0.2 seconds elapses. Then, display control processing (see step S9022) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 908a and 908b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variation display of the special symbol in the special symbol display 908a, 908b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 9056 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or not (step S903203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when transition to special symbol stop processing), the CPU 9056 is a special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting display control data in an output buffer for special symbol display control data setting is performed (step S903204). In this case, the CPU 9056 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. Then, display control processing (see step S9022) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 908a and 908b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 908a, 908b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the processing of step S903204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for stopping symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data in the display control processing of step S9022 Based on, the latest stop symbol will continue to be displayed stopped until the next variable display is started. Also, if the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S903201 (that is, if it is either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation processing), for the special symbol variation display The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a gap between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 90560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 90100 side, the display result designation command transmission process also changes. The time timer may be configured to be decremented by one.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag, but in the special symbol process processing, the start flag is set at the start of variation of the special symbol. At the same time, the end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S9032), the CPU 9056 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the setting of the start flag, and based on the end flag being set. The special symbol display control data may be set to stop and display the stop symbol.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90101) mounted on the effect control board 9080 as effect control means. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90101 starts execution of the main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 4 ms) of effect control (step S90701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90101 shifts to loop processing to monitor the timer interrupt flag (step S90702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main processing, when the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the flag (step S90703), and executes the following effect control processing.

  In the effect control process, first, the effect control CPU 90101 analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S90704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs effect control process processing (step S90705). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the effect display device 909.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs a fourth symbol process process (step S90706). In the fourth symbol process processing, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the processing corresponding to the current control state (the fourth symbol process flag) is selected and the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d of the effect display device 909 are selected. Execute the display control of the fourth symbol.

  Next, random number update processing is performed to update the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S90707). Then, it transfers to step S90702.

  FIG. 58 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing effect control commands received from the game control microcomputer 90560 of the main substrate 9031. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is formed of a 12-byte area of the reception command buffers 1-12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating which area the received command is to be stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value of 0-11. The ring buffer type may not necessarily be used.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 39 and FIG. 40) the effect control command stored in the buffer area. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed prior to the timer interrupt process which is executed every 4 ms.

  59 to 61 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S90704). Although the effect control command received from the main substrate 9031 is stored in the reception command buffer, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90101 first confirms whether a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S90611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where the two match each other is the case where the reception command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 90101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S90612). Note that when read out, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S90613). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a change pattern command (step S90614), the effect control CPU 90101 stores the received change pattern command in the change pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90615). Then, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90616).

  If the received effect control command is the display result designation command (step S90617), the effect control CPU 90101 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 6 designation command) in the RAM. The command is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S90618).

  If the received effect control command is the symbol determination specification command (step S90619), the effect control CPU 90101 sets a determination command reception flag (step S90620).

  If the received effect control command is a big hit start designation command (command A001 to A002 (H)) (step S90621), the effect control CPU 90101 sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step S90622). In this case, for example, if the big hit start 1 specified command is received, the big hit start 1 specified command reception flag is set, and if the big hit start 2 specified command is received, the big hit start 2 specified command received flag set.

  If the received effect control command is the small hit / suddenly odd variation big hit start designation command (command A 003 (H)) (step S90623), the CPU for effect control 90101 sets the small hit / suddenly positive variation big hit start designation command reception flag (Step S90624).

  If the received effect control command is a big hit end designation command (commands A301 to A302 (H)) (step S90625), the effect control CPU 90101 sets a big hit end designation command reception flag (step S90626). In this case, for example, when the big hit end 1 specified command is received, the big hit end 1 specified command reception flag is set, and when the big hit end 2 specified command is received, the big hit end 2 specified command received flag set.

  If the received effect control command is the small hit / suddenly odd variation big hit end designation command (command A 303 (H)) (step S90627), the CPU for effect control 90101 sets the small hit / suddenly odd variation big hit end designation command reception flag (Step S90628).

  If the received effect control command is any symbol designation command (step S90651), the effect control CPU 90101 temporarily stores the received symbol designation command in the symbol designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S9061). S90652).

  If the received effect control command is any of the variation category commands (step S90653), the effect control CPU 90101 temporarily stores the received variation category command in the variation category command storage area formed in the RAM (step S9063). S90654).

  If the received effect control command is the first hold memory number addition designation command (step S90655), the CPU 90101 for effect control stores the first hold memory number stored in the first hold memory number storage area formed in the RAM. The value is incremented by 1 (step S90656). In addition, the effect control CPU 90101 includes a symbol designating command temporarily stored in the symbol designating command, a variation category command temporarily stored in the variation category command storage area, and the received first number-of-pending-memory-number addition designating command. , And stored in the first free storage area of the first start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90657).

  If the received effect control command is the second hold memory number addition designation command (step S90658), the effect control CPU 90101 is configured to store the second hold memory number stored in the second hold memory number storage area formed in the RAM. The value is incremented by 1 (step S90659). In addition, the effect control CPU 90101 includes a symbol designation command temporarily stored in the symbol designation command, a variation category command temporarily stored in the variation category command storage area, and the received second pending storage number addition designation command. , And stored in the first free storage area of the second start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90660).

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the start winning combination command storage area and the storage area for active display. Among these, FIG. 62 (A) shows a specific example of the first start winning command storage area, and FIG. 62 (B) shows a specific example of the second start winning command storage area, FIG. 62 (C) These show the specific example of the storage area for active display. As shown in FIG. 62A, in the first start winning command storage area, areas (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value of the first reserved storage number (4 in this example) are secured. There is. Further, in the second start winning command storage area, areas (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number are secured. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S901218A to S901220A of the first starting port switch passing process of FIG. 46 and steps S901218B to S901220B of the second starting port switch passing process, the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting hole 9013 When there is a start winning to the winning opening 9014, within one timer interrupt, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the pending storage number addition designation command (first pending storage number addition designation command or the second pending storage number Three commands of addition specification command) are transmitted in a set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 62, in each storage area 1 to 4 of the first start winning command storage area and the second start winning command storage area 1 to 4, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a pending storage count addition specification A storage area is secured so that commands can be stored in association.

  In this embodiment, the command transmission is performed in the order of the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the pending storage number addition designation command in one timer interrupt, so the effect control CPU 90101 performs symbol designation in the command analysis process. When the command and the variation category command are received, they are temporarily stored in the symbol designation command storage area and the variation category command storage area, respectively. Then, when the pending storage count addition designation command is received, it is understood that if the first pending storage count addition designation command is received, the first pending storage is increased by 1, and the second pending storage count addition designation command If it is determined that the second pending storage has increased by one if it is received, it is the first with the temporarily stored symbol specifying command and the variation category command if it is received the first pending storage count addition designation command. 1 Hold storage number addition specification command is stored in the first start winning command storage area, and if the second hold storage number addition specification command is received, the second storage with the temporarily stored symbol specification command and the change category command Store the number addition specification command in the second start winning command storage area (In FIG. 62, the first start winning command) An example is shown in which commands are stored in all storage areas of storage areas 1 to 4 of the storage area, and commands are stored only in storage area 1 of storage areas 1 to 4 of the second start winning command storage area. Has been

  In addition, each command stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 62 is sequentially described in steps S90664 and S90668 described later at the timing when variation display of the production symbol is started each time variation display of the production symbol is started. It is deleted. In this case, in this embodiment, since the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, first, the storage content of the storage area 1 of the second start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 62 (B) is deleted. . Then, if the second pending storage does not newly occur, only the first pending storage is stored, so the first shown in FIG. It is deleted from what is stored in the first storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area, and the content of the first start winning command storage area is shifted. For example, when the variable display of a new effect design is started in the storage state shown in FIG. 62 (A), each command stored in storage area 1 is deleted, and each is stored in storage area 2 The command is shifted to the storage area 1, each command stored in the storage area 3 is shifted to the storage area 2, and each command stored in the storage area 4 is shifted to the storage area 3.

  Further, in this embodiment, the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the pending storage count addition designating command, which are received when the starting winning combination occurs, are also referred to as a command upon starting winning combination when comprehensively expressed. In addition, among the commands at the time of the start winning combination, a pending storage number addition designation command which is a command for designating information capable of recognizing that the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number has increased is comprehensively represented. In some cases, it is also referred to as pending storage information. In addition, whether or not to be a big hit or small hit determined in the winning winning process at start winning (see FIG. 48), the determination result of the big hit type, a symbol specifying command which is a command indicating the determination result of the variation pattern type When expressing the fluctuation category command comprehensively, it is also referred to as a winning judgment result specification command or judgment result information.

  In the first start winning command storage area, the second start winning command storage area, and the active display storage area, information related to the display mode of the specific display (hold display, active display) is stored. Specifically, "display mode pattern", "change timing" and "operation frequency" are stored.

  The “display mode pattern” is a change pattern of the display mode of the specific display, and any one of Pt1 ′ to Pt4 ′ is stored. Pt1 'is a display mode pattern that does not change from white, Pt2' is a display mode pattern that changes from white to blue, and Pt3 'is a display mode pattern that changes from white to blue and further changes to red. Pt4 'is a display pattern changing from white to red. The number of changes of the display mode is not limited to once or twice, and a display mode pattern in which the display mode can be changed three or more times may be provided. Moreover, the display mode pattern (For example, the display mode pattern in which a display is started by blue or red) started from display modes other than white may be provided.

  The “change timing” is a timing at which the display mode of the specific display changes, and is stored when the display mode pattern (display mode pattern other than Pt1 ′) is changed. Specifically, "active" indicating that it is the timing displayed as active display, and "first" indicating that it is the timing displayed as the first pending display, and Is stored as either the "second" indicating that it is the timing at which it is displayed as the pending display of the "," or the "third" which indicates that it is the timing at which it is displayed as the third pending display. Ru.

  The "operation frequency" is the frequency at which the display position (advance position, retraction position) of the hold display is switched, and either "high frequency" with high frequency or "low frequency" with low frequency is selected. Stored.

  If the received effect control command is the first hold memory number subtraction designation command (step S90661), the CPU for effect control 90101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first hold memory number stored in the first hold memory number storage area ( Step S90662). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether a high base state flag indicating a high base state is set (step S90663A), and if set, the process moves to step S90664. If not set, the first hold display and the active display are updated (step S90663B). Specifically, the active display in the active display unit 9018d is erased, and the first hold display is shifted one by one (for example, the first first display of the hold storage display unit 9018c is shifted to the active display unit 9018d). , When the second to fourth first hold display of the hold storage display unit 9018c is lit and displayed, the first hold display that was displayed second is shifted to the first display area Then, the first hold display displayed in the third position is shifted to the second display area, and the first hold display displayed in the fourth position is shifted to the third display area).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 updates the active storage area (step S90663C). Specifically, information regarding the display mode pattern, the change timing, and the operation frequency stored in the first storage area of the first start winning command storage area is stored in the active storage area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 is a command at the time of the start winning that is stored in the first storage area of the command storage area at the time of the first start winning (design designation command, variation category command, and first pending storage number addition designation) Information regarding the display mode of the command and the specific display (display mode pattern, change timing, and operation frequency) is deleted, and the content of the first start winning command storage area is shifted (step S90664).

  If the received effect control command is the second hold memory number subtraction designation command (step S90665), the CPU for effect control 90101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second hold memory number stored in the second hold memory number storage area ( Step S90666). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether the high base state flag is set (step S90667A), and if it is not set, the process proceeds to step S90668. If it is set, the second hold display is updated (step S90667B). Specifically, the active display in the active display portion 9018 d is erased, and the second hold display is shifted one by one (for example, the first second hold display of the hold storage display portion 9018 c is shifted to the active display portion 9018 d When the second to fourth second hold display of the hold storage display portion 9018c is lit and displayed, the second hold display that was displayed second is shifted to the first display area The second hold display displayed in the third position is shifted to the second display area, and the second hold display displayed in the fourth position is shifted to the third display area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 updates the active storage area (step S90667C). Specifically, information regarding the display mode pattern, change timing, and operation frequency stored in the first storage area of the second start winning command storage area is stored in the active storage area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 is a command at the time of the start winning that is stored in the first storage area of the command storage area at the time of the second start winning (design designation command, variation category command, and first pending storage number addition designation) Information regarding the display mode of the command and the specific display (display mode pattern, change timing, and operation frequency) is deleted, and the content of the second start winning command storage area is shifted (step S90668).

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S90669), the effect control CPU 90101 displays a background screen according to the normal state (for example, a background screen with a blue background color) on the effect display device 909. ) (Step S90670). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability / low base state), an effect mode according to the normal state is displayed by displaying a background screen according to the normal state (hereinafter, referred to as It is controlled to be in the normal effect mode). Further, if it is set, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the high base state flag (steps S90671A and S90671B), and switches the hold display displayed on the hold storage display unit 9018c from the second hold display to the first hold display (Step S90671 C).

  If the received effect control command is the short time state background designation command (step S90672), the effect control CPU 90101 causes the background screen of the effect display device 909 to correspond to the short time state (for example, a background screen with a green background color). ) (Step S90673). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the short time state (low probability / high base state), the effect mode according to the short time state is displayed by displaying the background screen according to the short state. (Also referred to as time-saving effect mode). Also, if the effect control CPU 90101 does not set it, it sets the time saving state flag (steps S90674A, S90674B), and switches the hold display displayed on the hold storage display unit 9018c from the first hold display to the second hold display (step S90674C).

  If the received effect control command is a probability variation state background designation command (step S90676), the effect control CPU 90101 displays a background screen according to the probability variation state in the effect display device 909 (for example, a background screen of red background color) ) (Step S90677). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability / high base state), a background screen according to the positive change state is displayed to display an effect mode according to the positive change state (hereinafter referred to as (Also referred to as a probability variation production mode). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 proceeds to step S90674A.

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S90679). For example, if the received effect control command is a waiting for customer demonstration specification command, a waiting for customer demonstration specification command receiving flag indicating that a waiting for customer demonstration specification command has been received is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S90611.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (step S90705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90101 first executes a hold display control process for controlling the display mode of the hold display (step S90800A). Hereinafter, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display may be referred to as "pre-reading advance notice effect".

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs one of steps S90800 to S90807 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 909 is controlled, and variable display of the effect symbol is realized, but the control regarding variable display of effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol is also the second Control relating to variable display of the rendering symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol is also executed in one rendering control process. In addition, even if it is configured to execute the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the second special symbol by another effect control process process. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which of the special symbols is displayed depending on which of the effect control process processing is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800): It is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command is received from the gaming control microcomputer 90560. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect pattern variation start process (step S90801).

  Effect pattern fluctuation start process (step S90801): Control is performed so that the change of effect pattern is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S90802).

  Process during production symbol fluctuation (step S90802): While controlling the switching timing and the like of each fluctuation state (variation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, the end of fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S90803).

  Effect pattern fluctuation stop processing (step S90803): Stop the fluctuation of the effect pattern and perform control to derive and display the display result (stop pattern). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S90804) or the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800).

  Big hit display process (step S90804): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for reporting the occurrence of a big hit on the effect display device 909. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S90805).

  In-round process (step S90805): Display control in the round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post round process (step S90806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S90807).

  Post-round processing (step S90806): Perform display control between rounds. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the round (step S90805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S90807): In the effect display device 909, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800).

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the hold display control process. In the hold display control process, the CPU for effect control 90101 checks whether a new start winning combination has occurred and a new start winning combination command has been received (step S903901). Specifically, if a new command is stored in the first start winning command storage area or the second start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 62, a new start winning occurs and a new start winning prize is generated. It can be determined that a command has been received. If the command for start winning is not newly received, the hold display control process is ended as it is.

  If a command at the time of starting winning is newly received, it is determined whether or not the high base status flag is set (step S903902), and if it is not set (if it is in the low base status), new pending It is determined whether the storage is the first pending storage (step S903903). Specifically, when the storage area storing the new start winning command is the first start winning command storage area, it is determined that the new hold storage is the first hold storage. If it is the second hold storage, the hold display control process is ended as it is.

  If it is the first hold storage, it is determined whether the display mode pattern of all the first hold displays is Pt1 '(step S903904). Specifically, when a display mode pattern other than Pt1 'is stored in the first start winning storage area shown in FIG. 62A, the display mode patterns of all the first suspension displays are Pt1'. If it is determined that there is no display mode pattern other than Pt1 'stored in the first start winning storage area, it is determined that the display mode patterns of all the first suspension displays are Pt1'. If there is a first pending display of a non-Pt1 'display mode pattern, the display mode pattern of the new first pending display is determined to be Pt1' (step S903905), while the first pending display mode pattern is not Pt1 ' When there is no display, a display mode pattern determination lottery for determining a display mode pattern of a new first hold display is performed (step S903906). Specifically, the display mode pattern determination lottery is performed using the display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory view of a display manner pattern determination lottery table. In the display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 65, display mode patterns (Pt1 '̃) according to the determination result at the time of winning (probable variation big hit or normal big hit, sudden positive variation big hit (suspicious big hit) or small hit, super reach deviation, etc.). Although determination values corresponding to Pt4 ′) are assigned, in the example shown in FIG. 65, the proportion of the determination values assigned is shown in order to simplify the description. For example, the effect control CPU 90101 extracts a random number for display mode pattern determination lottery, and determines it as a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  FIG. 65 (A) is a first display mode pattern determination lottery table used when the number of suspended memories is 1, and FIG. 65 (B) is a first display used when the number of suspended memories is two or more. It is a display mode pattern determination lottery table. Here, the “number of pending storages” means the number of first pending storages when the newly occurring pending storage is the first pending storage (ie, when the display mode pattern determination lottery in step S903906 is executed) If the newly generated pending storage is the second pending storage (i.e., if the display mode pattern determination lottery in step S903924 is executed), the second pending storage number.

  First, the first display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 65 (A) will be described. For example, if the winning determination result is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designation command is C401 (H) or C 402 (H)), Pt1 'is 20% and Pt2' is 30%. And Pt4 'is determined at a rate of 50%.

  For example, if the result of the winning determination is sudden big hit or small hit (when the symbol designation command is C403 (H) or C 404 (H)), Pt1 'is 25% and Pt2' is 35%. In proportion, Pt4 'is determined at a proportion of 40%.

  For example, in the case where the determination result at the time of winning is a super reach loss (when the symbol designation command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)), the percentage of Pt1 'is 50% Then, Pt2 'is determined at a rate of 30% and Pt4' at a rate of 20%.

  For example, when the result of the winning determination is other than that, Pt1 'is determined at a rate of 90% and Pt2' at a rate of 10%.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the display mode of the specific display can be changed only once per change, Pt3 ', in which the number of changes is two, is 1. Is not selected. If the display mode of the specific display can be changed a plurality of times during one change, Pt3 'may be selectable even if the number of pending storages is one.

  Next, the second display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 65 (B) will be described. For example, if the winning determination result is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designation command is C401 (H) or C 402 (H)), Pt1 'is 10% and Pt2' is 20%. Then, Pt3 'is determined at a rate of 30% and Pt4' at a rate of 40%.

  For example, if the result of the winning judgment is sudden big hit or small hit (when the symbol designation command is C403 (H) or C 404 (H)), Pt1 'is 15% and Pt2' is 20%. In proportion, Pt3 'is determined at a rate of 30% and Pt4' at a rate of 35%.

  For example, in the case where the winning determination result is a super reach loss (when the symbol designation command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)), the percentage of Pt1 'is 40% Then, Pt2 'is determined at a rate of 30%, Pt3' at a rate of 20%, and Pt4 'at a rate of 10%.

  For example, when the result of the winning determination is other than that, Pt1 'is determined at a rate of 90% and Pt2' at a rate of 10%.

  As a result, the expectation for each display mode pattern is Pt1 '<Pt2' <Pt3 '<Pt4'. Moreover, the expectation degree which the display mode of a pending | holding display shows is white <blue <red. Note that a display mode pattern may be provided that can be selected only when it is a big hit or a particular big hit. In addition, a display mode (for example, rainbow) that can be changed only in the display mode pattern may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode pattern is determined at the same ratio when the winning determination result is a probability variation big hit and a normal big hit, but the display mode patterns are different at different rates. It may be determined. Similarly, the display mode patterns may be determined at different rates depending on whether the winning determination result is a definite positive big hit or a small hit.

  Further, the ratio of determining the display mode pattern may be different depending on the finer conditions. For example, the display mode pattern may be determined at different rates based on the type of reach effect indicated by the change category command, the presence or absence of pseudo run, or the number of pseudo runs.

  After step S903905 or step S903906, when the display mode pattern other than Pt1 'is determined, the effect control CPU 90101 executes a change timing determination lottery for determining the change timing of the display mode of the specific display ( N in step S903907, S903908). Specifically, the change timing determination lottery is performed using the change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 66 is an explanatory view of a change timing determination lottery table. In the change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 66, according to the determination result at the time of winning (probable variation big hit or normal big hit, sudden positive variation big hit (suspicious big hit) or small hit, super reach deviated, etc.) and the number of reserved memories (1 to 4) In the example shown in FIG. 66, determination values corresponding to the change timing (active, first, second and third) are assigned. The percentage of is shown. For example, the effect control CPU 90101 extracts a random number for a change timing determination lottery, and determines it as a determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  Here, the “number of pending storages” is the number of the first pending storage number when the newly created pending storage is the first pending storage (ie, when the change timing determination lottery in step S903908 is executed). If the newly generated pending storage is the second pending storage (i.e., if the change timing determination lottery in step S903926 is executed), it means the second pending storage number.

  FIG. 66 (A) is a first change timing determination lottery table used when the number of changes is 1 (ie, when the display mode pattern is Pt2 ′ or Pt4 ′), and FIG. 66 (B) is It is a 2nd change timing determination lottery table used when the change frequency is 2 (namely, when a display mode pattern is Pt3 ').

  First, the first change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 66 (A) will be described. For example, if the number of pending storages is "4" and the result at the time of winning determination is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designation command is C401 (H) or C 402 (H)), the "third" is At a rate of 40%, "the second" is determined at a rate of 30%, "one" at a rate of 40%, and "active" at a rate of 10%.

  For example, if the number of pending storages is "4" and the result of the winning determination is suddenly a big or small hit (when the symbol designation command is C403 (H) or C 404 (H)), the "third" Is determined at a rate of 37%, at a rate of "second" at a rate of 33%, at a rate of "first" at a rate of 17%, and "active" at a rate of 13%.

  For example, when the number of pending storages is "4" and the result of winning determination is "Super reach out" (the symbol designation command is C400 (H) and the change category command is C 607 (H) or C 609 (H) Case), the ratio of “3rd” is 13%, “2nd” is 17%, “1st” is 33%, and “active” is 37%. Ru.

  For example, when the number of pending storages is "4" and the result at the time of winning determination is "other", "third" is 10% and "second" is 20%, "first" Is determined at a rate of 30% and "active" at a rate of 40%.

  Also, for example, when the number of pending storages is “3” and the result of the winning determination is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designation command is C401 (H) or C 402 (H)), “second Is determined at a rate of 50%, "first" at a rate of 30%, and "active" at a rate of 20%.

  For example, if the number of pending storages is "3" and the result of the winning determination is suddenly a big or small hit (when the symbol designation command is C403 (H) or C 404 (H)), the "second" Is determined at a rate of 40%, "first" at a rate of 35%, and "active" at a rate of 25%.

  For example, when the number of pending storages is "3" and the result of winning determination is "Super reach out" (the symbol designation command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C 607 (H) or C 609 (H) In the case of "the second" is determined at a rate of 25%, the "first" at a rate of 35%, and the "active" at a rate of 40%.

  For example, if the number of pending storages is "3" and the result at the time of winning determination is "other", the "second" has a ratio of 20%, the "first" has a ratio of 30%, and "active" has It is determined at a rate of 50%.

  Also, for example, when the number of pending storages is “2” and the result of the winning determination is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designation command is C401 (H) or C 402 (H)), “first "70%" and "active" 30%.

  For example, if the number of pending storages is "2" and the result at the time of winning determination is a sudden big hit or small hit (when the symbol designation command is C403 (H) or C 404 (H)), the "first one" Is determined at a rate of 60% and "active" at a rate of 40%.

  For example, when the number of pending storages is "2" and the result at the time of winning determination is "Super reach out" (the symbol designation command is C400 (H) and the change category command is C 607 (H) or C 609 (H) In the case where "the first" is determined at a rate of 40%, "active" is determined at a rate of 60%.

  For example, when the number of pending storages is “2” and the result of the winning determination is “other”, “first” is determined at a rate of 30% and “active” is determined at a rate of 70%.

  Also, for example, when the number of pending storages is “1”, “active” is determined at a rate of 100%.

  Next, the second change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 66 (B) will be described. For example, if the number of pending storages is "4" and the winning determination result is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designation command is C401 (H) or C 402 (H)), the "third" and 30% of the "second" combinations, 25% of the "third" and "first" combinations, 20% of the "third" and "active" combinations The combination of "second" and "first" is 13%, and the combination of "second" and "active" is 7%. "First" and "active" The combination is determined at a rate of 5%.

  For example, if the number of pending storages is "4" and the result of the winning determination is suddenly a big or small hit (when the symbol designation command is C403 (H) or C 404 (H)), the "third" And the combination of "the second" is 20%, the combination of "the third" and "the first" is 25%, and the combination of the "third" and the "active" is 25% In proportion, the combination of "second" and "first" is 15%, and the combination of "second" and "active" is 10%, "first" and "active" The combination of is determined at a rate of 5%.

  For example, when the number of pending storages is "4" and the result of winning determination is "Super reach out" (the symbol designation command is C400 (H) and the change category command is C 607 (H) or C 609 (H) Case), the combination of "third" and "second" is 5%, and the combination of "third" and "first" is 10%, "third" and " The combination of "active" is 15%, the combination of "second" and "first" is 25%, and the combination of "second" and "active" is 25%, " The combination of "first" and "active" is determined at a rate of 20%.

  For example, if the number of pending storages is "4" and the winning determination result is "other", the combination of "third" and "second" is 5%, and "third" and "1" The combination of "the second" and the combination of "the second" and the "first" are 20%, and the combination of the "third" and the "active" is 13%. The combination of "second" and "active" is determined at a rate of 25%, and the combination of "first" and "active" is determined at a rate of 30%.

  Also, for example, when the number of pending storages is “3” and the result of the winning determination is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designation command is C401 (H) or C 402 (H)), “second 50% of the combinations of “first” and 30% of the combinations of “second” and “active”, and 20% of the combinations of “first” and “active” Is determined.

  For example, if the number of pending storages is "3" and the result of the winning determination is suddenly a big or small hit (when the symbol designation command is C403 (H) or C 404 (H)), the "second" And the combination of "first" is 40%, the combination of "second" and "active" is 35%, and the combination of "first" and "active" is 25% ,It is determined.

  For example, when the number of pending storages is "3" and the result of winning determination is "Super reach out" (the symbol designation command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C 607 (H) or C 609 (H) Case), the combination of "second" and "first" is 25%, the combination of "second" and "active" is 35%, "first" and "active" The combination of is determined at a rate of 40%.

  For example, if the number of pending storages is "3" and the winning determination result is "other", the combination of "second" and "first" is 20%, and "second" and "active" The “combination” is determined at a rate of 30%, and the combination of “first” and “active” is determined at a rate of 50%.

  Also, for example, when the number of pending storages is "2", the combination of "first" and "active" is determined at a rate of 100%.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the reliability against a big hit is increased as the display mode changes at an early timing after the start of the hold display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The reliability of the jackpot may be so low that the display mode changes as soon as the pending display starts.

  In this embodiment, the change timing is determined using the change timing determination table shown in FIG. 66. However, the change timing is determined at a different rate based on which display mode is used. It may be For example, when changing to red, a later timing (for example, “active”) may be determined as the changing timing at a higher rate than when changing to blue.

  In the present embodiment, the change timing is determined at the same ratio in the case where the winning determination result is a probability variation big hit and the normal big hit, but the change timing is determined at different rates. You may do it. Similarly, the change timing may be determined at different rates depending on whether the winning determination result is a sudden positive variation big hit or a small hit.

  Further, the rate at which the change timing is determined may be different depending on the finer conditions. For example, the change timing may be determined at different rates based on the type of reach effect indicated by the change category command, the presence or absence of pseudo run, or the number of pseudo runs.

  After execution of step S903907 Y or step S903908, the effect control CPU 90101 stores the determination result (display mode pattern and change timing) in the first start winning command storage area (step S903909), and the operation frequency is low as the operation frequency. It stores it (step S903910). Then, a new first hold display is started in white (step S903911).

  If the high base state flag is set in step S903902, it is determined whether the new pending storage is the second pending storage (step S903921). Specifically, when the storage area storing the new start winning command is the second start winning command storage area, it is determined that the new hold storage is the second hold storage. In the case of the first hold storage, the hold display control process is ended as it is.

  If it is the second hold storage, it is determined whether the display mode pattern of all the second hold displays is Pt1 '(step S903922). Specifically, when a display mode pattern other than Pt1 'is stored in the second start winning storage area shown in FIG. 62 (B), the display mode patterns of all the second suspension displays are Pt1'. If it is determined that there is no display mode pattern other than Pt1 'stored in the second start winning storage area, it is determined that the display mode patterns of all the second suspension displays are Pt1'. When the second hold display of the display mode pattern other than Pt1 'is present, the display mode pattern of the new second hold display is determined as Pt1' (step S903923), while the second hold of the display mode pattern other than Pt1 'is not When there is no display, a display mode pattern determination lottery for determining a display mode pattern of a new second hold display is performed (step S903924). Specifically, a display mode pattern determination lottery is performed using the display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG.

  After step S903923 or step S903924, when the display mode pattern other than Pt1 'is determined, the effect control CPU 90101 executes a change timing determination lottery for determining the change timing (N in step S903925, S903926 ). Specifically, a change timing determination lottery is performed using the change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG.

  After execution of step S903925 Y or step S903926, the effect control CPU 90101 stores the determination result (display mode pattern and change timing) in the second start winning command storage area (step S903927), and the operation frequency is low as the operation frequency. It stores it (step S903928). Then, a new second hold display is started in white (step S903929).

  FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90811). If the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S90812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S90801) (step S90813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even at the time of power failure recovery (see step S9044). However, as shown in FIG. 67, in this embodiment, the normal time Since, based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern command is received, it moves to the production design fluctuation start processing and starts the fluctuation indication of the production design, the fluctuation of the production design only by receiving the display result specification command without receiving the fluctuation pattern command The display does not start.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S90801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 90101 first reads a change pattern command from the change pattern command storage area (step S908001). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 displays the effect pattern display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step S908001 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). The symbol) is determined (step S908002). That is, when the effect control CPU 90101 executes the process of step S908002, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the design symbol according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means Display result determining means for determining the symbol) is realized. In addition, when pseudo run is designated by the change pattern command, CPU90101 for production control is the chance eye design (for example, "223" or "445" as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo run in step S908002. Also, although it is not a reach, a combination of a big hit symbol and a symbol whose one symbol is off is also determined. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 stores data indicating the stop symbol of the determined effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S908002, effect control CPU 90101 may determine whether or not the jackpot is a big hit based on the received fluctuation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the production symbol based only on the fluctuation pattern command. .

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory view showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 909. In the example shown in FIG. 69, when the received display result designation command indicates “normal big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 90101 is stopped. Determine the combination of the production design that the 3 designs are aligned with the same even design as the design. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates "a certainty big hit" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 90101 has 3 symbols as a stop symbol. Determine the combination of the production symbols aligned with the same odd symbols.

  Also, if the received display result specification command indicates "Suddenly positive probability big hit" or "small hit" (if the received display result specification command is the display result 4 specification command or the display result 5 specification command), The effect control CPU 90101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as a stop symbol. Then, in the case of “off” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when it is accompanied by the reach effect, the combination of the effect pattern with the two left and right symbols aligned is determined. Further, the combination of three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 909 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 90101, for example, extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of effect symbols are associated with numerical values, the stop symbol of the effect symbol decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

  In addition, also about a production pattern, it is called a big hit design the stop pattern (combination of the symbols in which the left middle and the right are all aligned with the same design) that evokes a big hit. Further, in this embodiment, since the stop display is performed in a state in which the left middle, the right and the left are aligned with the odd symbols when it becomes the definite variation big hit, it is recalled that the odd symbols become the definite variation big hit. The symbol that reminds me of such a big hit is called a odd symbol. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the big hit is normal, the left middle, the right, and the left are evenly displayed with the even symbols, so even symbols are not likely to be a big hit (usually a big hit) . Such a pattern that reminds me of not becoming a definite big hit is called a non-deterministic pattern. In addition, the stop design which reminds of the release is called the release design.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 executes a notice effect (a notice effect excluding the advance notice effect. For example, a step-up notice effect, a character notice effect, a speech notice effect, etc.) on the effect display device 909 during fluctuation display of the effect pattern. The notice effect setting process is executed to determine whether or not to set an effect mode of the notice effect (step S908003).

  Then, the effect control CPU 90101 executes operation frequency determination processing for determining the operation frequency of the specific display (pending display, active display) (step S908003A).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 selects a process table according to the change effect, the advance effect when the advance effect is executed, and the change effect when the advance effect is executed (step S908004). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S908005).

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory view of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 90101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 90101 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the effect display device 909 in accordance with the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data etc. is described which indicates the aspect of each variation constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect pattern. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is described. Moreover, the fluctuation time in the aspect of the fluctuation | variation is set to the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 90101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 70 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 9080. Moreover, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern. When it is determined to execute the advance effect, the effect control CPU 90101 selects a process table corresponding to the advance effect in step S908004.

  In the process table used when effect control is executed for the fluctuation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. It should be noted that instead of setting symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying symbols are generated in combination according to the determined stop symbols and the pseudo stop symbols in the pseudo reunion and the slip effect. May be

  In addition, the effect control CPU 90101 performs effect device (effect component as effect component 909 as effect component, effect component as effect component according to contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) Control of the various lamps and the speaker 9027 as an effect part is executed (step S908006). For example, in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 909, a command is output to the VDP 90109. Further, in order to control various lamps to turn on / off, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver substrate 9035. Further, in order to perform audio output from the speaker 9027, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio output substrate 9070.

  In this embodiment, the CPU for effect control 90101 controls variable display of the effect symbol according to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in a one-to-one manner, but the CPU for effect control 90101 performs fluctuation pattern command The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S908007).

  Then, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S90802) (step S908008).

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing operation frequency determination processing. In the operation frequency determination process, the CPU for effect control 90101 performs the process (steps S904500 to S904506) for determining the presence / absence of the execution of the change effect in the variation to be started, the type of the change effect when executing, and the specific display of the execution object. After execution, processing (steps S904507 to S904511) for determining the operation frequency of each specific display is performed.

  First, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether a red specific display is displayed (step S904500), and when it is displayed, the process proceeds to step S904507. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the display mode does not change only in a single specific display, when the red specific display (the specific display of the display mode with the highest reliability) is already displayed, Even if the change effect is executed, no further change in the display mode can be expected, so the change effect can not be executed. It should be noted that even if there is no further change in the display mode, it may be possible to execute the change effect, or if it is a gaming machine that can change the display modes of a plurality of specific displays, it is most reliable. Even when the specific display of the high display mode is displayed, the change effect may be executable.

  When the red specific display is not displayed, the CPU for effect control 90101 executes a change effect execution lottery for determining the presence or absence of the change effect in the start change (step S904501). Specifically, a change effect execution lottery is performed using a change effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 72 (A).

  FIG. 72 (A) is an explanatory view showing a change presentation execution lottery table. In the change presentation execution lottery table shown in FIG. 72 (A), the presence or absence of execution of the change presentation and the type of change presentation in the case of execution according to the presence or absence of the change display of the specific display in the start change Judgment values corresponding to (first change presentation, second change presentation) are assigned, but in the example shown in FIG. 72 (A), the proportion of the assigned judgment values is shown in order to simplify the description. It is done. For example, the effect control CPU 90101 extracts a random number for a change effect execution lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  The start winning combination command storage area shown in FIG. 62 (the first starting winning combination command when the starting variation is a variation based on the first hold storage), as to whether or not there is a change schedule of the specific display in the starting variation. It is determined based on the storage area, and the second start winning command storage area) if the start change is a change based on the second hold storage. At this time, since the update of the start winning command storage area based on the start of the change (steps S90664 and S90668) is not performed, the information on the variation to be started is one of the start winning command storage areas. It is stored in the eye storage area. Therefore, whether "active" is stored as the change timing in the first storage area, "first" is stored as the change timing in the second storage area, or change in the third storage area If the "second" is stored as the timing or the "third" is stored as the change timing in the fourth storage area, it is determined that there is a change schedule.

  For example, when there is a change schedule, the execution of the first change presentation is determined at a rate of 70%, and the execution of the second change presentation is determined at a rate of 30%. When there is no change schedule, it is determined that the first change presentation is performed at a rate of 3%, the second change presentation is performed at a rate of 7%, and the change production is not performed at a rate of 90%. Ru.

  Thus, when there is a change schedule, one of the change effects is always executed. That is, the display mode can be changed only when the change effect is executed.

  In addition, as described above, when there is a change schedule, the first change effect is executed at a higher rate than the second change effect, and when there is no change schedule, the second change effect is the first change effect It is configured to run at a higher rate. Thereby, the display mode of the specific effect is changed at a higher rate in the case where the first change effect is executed than in the case where the second change effect is executed. Therefore, the presence or absence of a change in the display mode of the specific display is suggested depending on the type of change effect.

  In the present embodiment, the first change presentation and the second change presentation are provided as the types of change presentation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a change effect may be provided in which the display mode of the specific display always changes at the time of execution.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation frequency is determined after the type of the change effect is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation frequency of the specific display is determined before the type of the change effect, and the type of the change effect is determined based on the operation frequency (for example, the second change effect is likely to be selected if the frequency is low) It is also good.

  After step S904501, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not to execute the change effect (step S904502), and if it is not executed, the process moves to step S904507. If a change effect is to be performed, it is determined whether or not there is a change schedule (step S904503), and if there is no change schedule (that is, if a change effect is executed but the display mode is not changed), the blue specific display It is determined whether or not is displayed (step S904503A), and when it is not displayed, an execution target determination lottery for determining a specific display of an execution target of the change effect is executed (step S904503B). Specifically, an execution target determination lottery is performed using the execution target determination lottery table shown in FIG. 72 (B).

  FIG. 72 (B) is an explanatory view showing the execution target determination lottery table. In the execution target determination lottery table shown in FIG. 72 (B), the target of change effect execution according to the number of pending storages (active display, first pending display, second pending display, third pending display) In the example shown in FIG. 72 (B), the ratio of assigned judgment values is shown in the example shown in FIG. 72 (B). For example, the effect control CPU 90101 extracts a random number for the execution target determination lottery, and determines it as a determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  Here, the “number of pending storages” refers to the number of the first pending storages when the variation to be started is a variation based on the first pending storage, and when it is a variation based on the second pending storage. It is the second pending storage number. At this stage, the subtraction of the number of pending storages based on the start of the change (steps S90662 and S90666) is not performed.

  For example, if the number of pending storages is "4", then the percentage of active display targets for execution is 40%, and the percentage for the first pending display target is execution of 20%, the second It is determined that the third pending display is to be executed at a rate of 20%, and the third pending display is to be executed at a rate of 20%.

  For example, if the number of pending storages is "3", then 60% of the active display targets for execution, and 20% for the first pending display target. It is decided at a rate of 20% to execute the pending display of.

  For example, in the case where the number of pending storages is “2”, it is determined at a ratio of 80% that the active display is to be executed at a ratio of 20% that the first pending display is to be performed.

  For example, when the number of pending storages is "1", it is determined that the active display is to be executed at a rate of 100%.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that active display can be easily performed. This can give the player a sense of expectation for the on-going fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, only the pending display that has already been displayed can be determined as the execution object of the change effect, but here, the execution object of the change effect (so-called, Gasse effect) in which the display mode does not change In order to make a decision, a pending display that is not displayed may be an execution target. For example, when the number of pending storages is "3" (that is, only the first pending display and the second pending display are displayed when the change effect is executed). Also, the third hold display can be determined as an execution target of the change effect, and when the third hold display is determined as an execution target, the change effect is displayed in the display area of the third hold display. It may be performed (if the first change effect is given, the hammer is swung and if it is the second change effect, the arrow passes).

  In S904503A, when the blue specific display is displayed, the blue specific display is determined as an execution target of the change effect (step S904504). As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the display mode of the specific display whose display mode has already changed to blue is further changed. In addition, even when the specific display in which the display mode has already changed to blue is displayed, the change effect (the display mode does not change) in which another specific display (specific display of white color) is an execution target It is also possible to execute (so-called, Gasse effect). However, it is considered that the player may be stressed by frequently executing the cassette effect targeted for execution of the other specific display despite the fact that the specific display already changed to blue is displayed. Be Therefore, even if it is possible to execute the cast effect that targets the specific display different from the specific display that has already changed to blue, the change effect that targets the specific display that has already changed to blue is the execution target It is desirable to run at a high rate.

  In step S904503, when there is a change schedule, the specific display (active display, hold display) which is the change schedule is determined as the execution target of the change effect (step S904505). As described above, at this time, since the update of the start winning command storage area based on the start of the change (steps S90664 and S90668) is not performed, the specific display corresponding to storage area 1 changes If it is scheduled, "active", if the specific display corresponding to storage area 2 is to change, "first", if the specific display corresponding to storage area 3 is going to change "second" If the specific display corresponding to the storage area 4 is to change, the "third" is determined as the change target.

  After executing any of steps S904503B, S904504, and S904505, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the type of change effect to be executed and the specific display of the execution target (step S904506). The process table corresponding to the change effect of the contents set here is selected in step S908004, and the change effect is executed by executing step S908006 and step S908105 described later.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 is a hold specific value K for specifying the number of the hold display (ie, the first hold display if K = 1, two for K = 2) Set "1" to the eye hold display, the third hold display if K = 3, and the fourth hold display if K = 4 (step S904507), and the operation frequency of each specific display Execute an operation frequency determination lottery to make a decision. Specifically, the operation frequency determination lottery is performed using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 72 (C) is an explanatory view showing an operation frequency determination lottery table. In the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 72 (C), presence or absence of a change schedule of the display mode of the specific display (change schedule of the K-th hold display) and change effect (change production to the K-th hold display) According to the decision value corresponding to the operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) is assigned, but in the example shown in FIG. 72 (C), in order to simplify the explanation, the ratio of the assigned decision value is It is shown. For example, the effect control CPU 90101 extracts a random number for the operation frequency determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  The presence or absence of the change schedule of the display mode of the specific display is determined with reference to the start winning combination command storage area shown in FIG. Specifically, if the hold specification number K = 1, “active” is stored as the change timing in the first storage area, or if the hold specification number K = 2, the change timing in the second storage area If “1st” is stored or if the hold specification number K = 3, then “2nd” is stored as the fluctuation timing in the third storage area, or the hold specification number K = 4 For example, if the "third" is stored as the fluctuation timing in the fourth storage area, it is determined that there is a change schedule.

  The “change effect” is determined based on the type of the change effect set in step S904506 and the execution target. For example, if the hold specification number K = 1, the active display is set as the execution target, if the hold specification number K = 2, the first hold display is set as the execution target, the hold specification number K If the second hold display is set as the execution target if = 3, and if the third hold display is set as the execution target if the hold specification number K = 4, the set type It is determined that the change effect is to be executed.

  For example, when there is a change schedule and the first change presentation is performed, the low frequency is determined at a rate of 20% and the high frequency is determined at a rate of 80%. When there is a change schedule and the second change presentation is performed, the low frequency is determined at a rate of 30% and the high frequency is determined at a rate of 70%.

  Also, for example, when there is no change schedule and the first change effect is executed, the low frequency is determined at a rate of 40% and the high frequency is determined at a rate of 60%. When there is no change schedule and the second change presentation is performed, the low frequency is determined at a rate of 45% and the high frequency is determined at a rate of 55%. If there is no change schedule and the change presentation is not performed, the low frequency is determined at a rate of 90% and the high frequency is determined at a rate of 10%.

  As described above, as the operation mode of the specific display which is an execution target of the change effect, the configuration is such that the high frequency is more easily determined than the low frequency. Therefore, the specific display in which the operation mode is high frequency is more likely to be the target of change presentation than the low frequency specific display.

  Further, the specific display with a change schedule has a configuration in which a high frequency is more easily determined as the operation frequency than the specific display without a change schedule. Therefore, the presence or absence of the change is suggested by the operation frequency.

  In the present embodiment, high frequency and low frequency are provided as the operation frequency, but it is also possible to provide a confirmed operation frequency that can be selected only when the change effect is performed. By performing the decision operation frequency, it is notified to the player that the change effect is to be executed.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, as described above, the specific display with a change schedule is selected to have a high frequency as the operation frequency at a higher rate than the specific display without a change schedule. It is not limited. For example, when a specific display with a change schedule is displayed, high frequency is selected as the operation frequency at a higher rate than when the specific display with a change schedule is not displayed (that is, change) Even in the case of a specific display without a schedule, when a specific display with a change schedule is displayed as another specific display, a high frequency may be easily selected as the operation frequency). Further, the higher the frequency, the higher the frequency may be selected as the specific display displayed at a position closer to the specific display having a change schedule.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 stores the operation mode of the K-th pending display (step S904509). For example, if K = 1, then the first storage area, if K = 2, the second storage area, if K = 3, then the third storage area, and K = 4. In the fourth storage area, "high frequency" or "low frequency" is stored as the operation mode. Then, if the fluctuation to be performed is a change based on the first hold storage, if the change to be performed is a change based on the second hold storage, the second hold storage number K It is determined whether or not the same value is the same value (step S904510), and if not the same value, the pending specified number K is incremented by 1 (step S904511), and the process proceeds to step S904508 again. In this way, the operation frequency for all stored pending storages is determined one by one. The operation frequency determination process is ended when the hold identification number K and the hold storage number become the same value.

  In step S904508, instead of or in addition to the operation frequency, an operation mode other than the operation frequency may be determined. For example, it may be determined whether the mole to be displayed as the specific display is in the popping-out mode or in the rotating mode.

  FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing a process during production design fluctuation (step S90802) in the production control process. In the process of rendering symbol variation, the value of the process timer is decremented by 1 (step S908101), and the value of the variation time timer is decremented by 1 (step S908102). When the process timer times out (step S908103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S908104). Also, the control state of the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data set next to the display control execution data (step S908105).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not a display position fixing flag indicating fixing of the display position of the specific display is set (step S904700A), and if set, moves to step S904707 . The display position fixing flag is a flag that is set during the execution of the first change presentation, that is, the processing of steps S904701 to S904706 during the execution of the first change presentation (the processing for changing the display position of the specific display) ) Is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, the switching of the display positions of all the specific displays is limited during the execution of the first change effect, but at least the display position of the specific display which is the execution target of the first change effect The switching of the display position of the other specific display may not be limited as long as it limits switching.

  When the display position fixing flag is not set in step S904700A, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the display position change timing set in advance is set (step S904700B). In this embodiment, the display position change timing is an even-numbered second after the start of the change, that is, the display position can change every two seconds. The display position change timing may be determined by lottery or may be determined for each fluctuation pattern.

  When it is the display position change timing (Y in step S904700B), the specific display specific number R for specifying the specific display of the number R (if R = 1 the first specific display (that is, active Display), if R = 2, the second specific display (ie, the first hold display), if R = 3, the third specific display (ie, the second hold display), R If it is = 4, 1 is set to the 4th specific display (that is, the 3rd pending display) (step S904701), and the display position of the specific display specified by the specific display specific number R is switched or not The display position switching lottery is performed to determine whether or not (step S904702). Specifically, the display position switching lottery is performed using the display position switching lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 74 is an explanatory view of the display position switching lottery table. In the display position switching lottery table shown in FIG. 74, determination values corresponding to the presence / absence of switching of the display position are assigned according to the operation frequency, but in the example shown in FIG. The ratio of the judged value is shown. For example, the effect control CPU 90101 extracts a random number for display position switching lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the operation frequency is high, switching the display position is determined at a rate of 70%, and not switching the display position is determined at a rate of 30%. Further, for example, when the operation frequency is low, switching of the display position is determined at a rate of 20%, and switching of the display position is determined at a rate of 80%.

  If it is determined to switch the display position (Y in step S904703), the display position of the Rth specific display is switched to the advanced position if the display position is the retracted position, and switched to the retracted position if the advanced position is the advanced position (step S904704). Then, if the value of the specific display identification number R is the number of pending storages (if the variation to be performed is a variation based on the first pending storage, the first number of pending storages, the variation to be performed is a variation based on the second pending storage, the second It is determined whether it is the same value as the value obtained by adding 1 to the pending storage number) (step S904705), and if it is not the same value, 1 is added to the specific display specific number R and the process moves to step S904702 again. As described above, it is determined whether to switch the display positions of all the specific displays one by one. If they are the same value, the process proceeds to step S904707.

  In step S904707, if the effect control CPU 90101 is the execution timing of the first change effect (Y in step S904707), the display position fixing flag is set (step S904707A), and the display mode of the specific display of the change effect execution target Is determined to change (step S904708). If the change is to be made, the display position of the specific display to be executed is switched to the advanced position (step S904709). If the change is not scheduled, the display position of the specific display to be executed is switched to the retracted position (step S904710). Thereby, when the first change effect is executed, the display mode changes if the display position of the specific display of the execution target of the first change effect is the advanced position, and the display mode does not change if the display position is the retracted position. It has become.

  In step S904711, if it is the end timing of the change effect (Y in step S904711), the effect control CPU 90101 resets the display position fixing flag if it is set (step S904711A), and the specific display of the execution object of the change effect It is determined whether or not the display mode is to be changed (step S904712). If the display mode is to be changed, the display mode of the specific display to be executed is changed (step S904713). In step S904713, the specific display is a display mode corresponding to the type of change effect (for example, when the first change effect is executed, the display mode is switched from an expressionless display mode to a display mode in which the eyes are opened and sweat is displayed On the other hand, when the second change effect is executed, the display mode is changed from the expression mode of no expression to the display mode of flowing tears and displayed, and then it is changed to blue or red. When the display is changed to blue or red, the display mode is switched to the expressionless expression again.

  Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S908111), the effect control CPU 90101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S90803) (step S908112).

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S90803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing, first, the effect control CPU 90101 checks whether a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S908301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S908305. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S908304. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the big hit symbol has been stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S908302 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S908305.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (discard symbol, big hit symbol) (step S908302).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the operation frequency storage area in the start winning command storage area and the active display storage area (step S905301). Thus, in the present embodiment, the operation frequency is updated for each change.

  Further, when the effect control CPU 90101 does not display either the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol in the process of step S 908 302 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S 908 303), the effect control CPU 90 101 The process proceeds to step S908311.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S908302 (Y in step S908303), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S908304) and receives the big hit start designation command. Check whether the big hit start designated command reception flag indicating that it is received or the small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designated command received flag which indicates that the small hit / suddenly sudden change big hit start specified command is received (step S908305) . When the big hit start designated command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly definite big hit big start designated command reception flag is set, CPU90101 for production control resets the stop design indicatory flag (step S908306), according to fanfare production A process table is selected (step S908307). If the big hit start designated command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly definite big hit big start start designated command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the effect control CPU 90101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S908308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number According to data 1 and movable member control data 1), the effect device (effect effect display device 909 as effect component, various lamps as effect component, speaker 9027 as effect component, and movable member 9078 as effect component Control of the blade members 9079a and 9079b) is executed (step S908309).

  Then, the effect control CPU 90101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the big hit display process (step S90804) (step S908310).

  If it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is made (N in step S908303), the CPU 90101 for effect control resets a predetermined flag (step S908311). For example, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the first symbol variation specification command reception flag and the second symbol variation specification command reception flag. The effect control CPU 90101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process processing or the fourth symbol process processing (for example, as shown in step S90811 of FIG. If the command reception flag is confirmed, the variation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately). However, for example, since the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both of the effect control process processing and the fourth symbol process processing, as shown in this embodiment, at the time of the end of variation, etc. It is desirable to reset at the time of, or at the time of the big hit end, in the big hit end effect processing. Then, the effect control CPU 90101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800) (step S908312).

  FIGS. 76 and 77 are explanatory diagrams showing display examples of the effect display device 909 when the change effect is executed. For example, FIGS. 76 (A1) to 76 (A3) show display examples in the case where the first change effect for the pending display whose display position is the advanced position is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 76 (A1), an active display 9051 and three suspension displays 9052 to 9054 are displayed as specific displays, and the display mode of any specific display is white. As for the display position of each specific display, only the first hold display 9052 is the advanced position, and the other specific displays (active display 9051, hold display 9053 and 9054) are evacuation positions. Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (A2), the first change presentation is executed for the first hold display 9052 whose display position is the advanced position. At this time, the first hold display 9052 hit with the hammer X is switched to a display mode in which the eyes are opened and sweated. Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (A3), the display mode of the first hold display 9052 for which the first change effect has been executed changes from white to blue.

  Further, for example, FIGS. 76 (B1) to 76 (B3) show display examples in the case where the first change effect for the pending display whose display position is the retracted position is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 76 (B1), an active display 9051 and three hold displays 9052 to 9054 are displayed as specific displays, and the display mode of any specific display is white. Further, the display position of each specific display is a retracted position. Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (B2), the first change presentation is executed for the first hold display 9052 whose display position is the retracted position. At this time, the hammer X in the first change effect does not strike the first hold display 9052. And as shown to FIG. 76 (B3), the display mode of the 1st pending | holding display 9052 in which the 1st change presentation was performed does not change.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the rate at which the display mode of the specific display changes varies depending on the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect (100% changes if the advanced position, and the retracted position If it does not change 100%).

  Further, for example, FIGS. 77 (A1) to (A3) show display examples in the case where the second change effect for the pending display whose display position is the advanced position is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 77 (A1), an active display 9051 and three suspension displays 9052 to 9054 are displayed as specific displays, and the display mode of any specific display is white. As for the display position of each specific display, only the first hold display 9052 is the advanced position, and the other specific displays (active display 9051, hold display 9053 and 9054) are evacuation positions. Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (A2), a second change presentation is executed for the first hold display 9052 whose display position is the advanced position. At this time, the first hold display 9052 hit by the arrow Y is switched to a teardrop display mode (a display mode different from that when struck by the hammer X in the first change effect). Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (A3), the display mode of the first hold display 9052 for which the second change effect has been executed changes from white to blue.

  Further, for example, FIGS. 77 (B1) to 77 (B3) show display examples in the case where the second change effect for the pending display whose display position is the retracted position is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 77 (B1), an active display and three hold displays 9052 to 9054 are displayed as the specific display 9051, and the display mode of any specific display is white. Also, the display position of each specific display is a retracted position. Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B2), a second change presentation is executed for the first hold display 9052 whose display position is the retracted position. At this time, the first hold display 9052 hit by the arrow Y is switched to a teardrop display mode (a display mode different from that when struck by the hammer X in the first change effect). Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (B3), the display mode of the first hold display 9052 for which the second change effect has been executed changes from white to blue.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the second change effect is executed, the display mode may change regardless of whether the display position of the specific display is the advanced position or the retracted position. It has become. In addition, even if the second change effect is executed, a pattern in which the released arrow Y does not hit the specific display is provided as a pattern in which the display mode of the specific display to be executed does not change.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the gaming machine is capable of performing variable display, and an aspect accompanied by an operation (in the present example, an aspect in which the display position is switched to the advanced position or the retracted position, Specific display corresponding to variable display (in this example, active display corresponding to fluctuation during execution), from the expression form without expression to the appearance with open eyes and the form switched to the display form with flowing tears The display mode (in this example, display color (white, blue, red) in the present example) that can be displayed pending display corresponding to the fluctuation that has not been started. The shape, pattern, position, range, etc. to be displayed It is also possible to display the active display by performing the steps S90663B and S90667B in the specific display means (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100) capable of changing the Display pending display by performing S903911 and S903929, and a part that changes the display mode of the specific display by performing step S904713, and the change indication effect that suggests the change of the display mode of the specific display (in this example, change) Change indication effect execution means (in this example, in the microcomputer 90100 for effect control in this example) which can execute the effect (first change effect, second change effect) sets the change effect in step S904506, and changes the change effect in step S908004 According to the present invention, a process table is selected, and steps S908006 and S908105 are performed to provide a part that executes change presentation.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the specific display means is an operation mode of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is performed (in the present example, the display position (advanced position, retracted position). Operation). The display mode of the specific display can be changed at a different rate (in this example, according to the frequency (high frequency, low frequency) or other operation mode such as display direction (for example, downward, rightward)). The effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904707 to S904709 to display the specific display at a rate of 100% when the display position of the specific display to be subjected to the first change presentation is the advanced position. While changing the mode, the display mode of the specific display is not changed when the display position of the specific display which is the execution target of the first change presentation is the retracted position It was the display mode of the display changing)) that. Thereby, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming machine is capable of displaying both of the active display and the hold display, and both of them can be displayed in the mode accompanied by the operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only one of the active display and the hold display may be displayed in a mode with an operation. Further, for example, only one of the active display and the hold display may be displayed.

  In addition, although the operation mode and display mode of the active display and the hold display are common, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the active display and the hold display can be displayed in different operation modes and display modes. It may be

  In the present embodiment, the display mode pattern and the change timing are determined at the start winning combination, and the presence / absence of change effect and the operation frequency are determined at the start of the change, but the determination timing is limited to this. Absent. For example, the display mode pattern may be determined at each start of change (that is, the change timing may also be determined at the start of change) without determining at the start winning combination whether or not to change the display mode during change. Or, it may be determined also about the presence or absence of the change effect or the operation frequency at the start winning combination.

  Moreover, although it was set as the structure which can display a pending | hold display to a maximum of four in this Embodiment, it does not restrict to this. For example, if it is possible to display both the first hold display and the second hold display, up to eight hold displays may be displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a change effect that suggests a change in the display mode of a single specific display is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and changes in the display modes of a plurality of specific displays are grouped together. It may be possible to execute a change effect that is suggested. For example, it is possible to execute a change effect that suggests that the display mode of the specific display for which the arrow was hit changes when two arrows are emitted toward the different specific displays.

  In the present embodiment, whether the display position of the specific display is the advanced position or the retracted position is performed only when a part of the change indication effects (first change effect) of the plurality of change indication effects is executed. Although the display mode of the specific display changes at a different ratio depending on the factor, it is different at a different ratio depending on whether the display position of the specific display is the advanced position or the retracted position when executing all kinds of change indication effects The display mode of the specific display may be changed.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the change suggestion effect executing means includes a first change suggestion effect (in this example, a first change effect) and a second change suggestion effect (in this example, a second effect). It is possible to execute one of a plurality of types of change indication effects including a change effect) (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs one of steps S908004, S908006, and S908105). The specific display means can display the specific display in different operation modes when the change suggestion effect to be executed is the first change suggestion effect and when it is the second change suggestion effect. (In this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs the step S904713 to perform an expressionless expression when executing the first change effect. While the eyes are opened from the mode and switched to the display mode in which sweat flows, and the specific display is displayed, the display mode is switched from the expression mode without expression to the display mode in which tears flow and the specific display is displayed. The operation frequency may be changed depending on which change indication effect is performed. Thereby, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the specific display after the change effect is performed is determined to be different depending on the change effect being performed. However, before or during the change effect is performed. The display mode of the specific display may be different depending on the change effect to be performed. For example, when a change effect is performed in which an apple falls from the sky, the display mode of the specific display may be switched to a mode in which the mouth is opened before the apple is displayed, or after the apple is displayed The display mode of the specific display may be switched in such a manner as to open the mouth until the apple reaches the specific display.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the specific display means is an operation mode of the specific display before the change suggestion effect is performed (in this example, the operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency). Display). The display mode of the specific display can be changed at a different ratio depending on the position (advanced position, retracted position) or other operation mode such as display direction (for example, downward, rightward) (in this example, By executing step S904508 using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 72C, the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs a case where the operation frequency of the specific display to be subjected to the change effect execution is high. The rate of change of the display mode differs depending on the frequency of low frequency. Thereby, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific display means displays the specific display in a mode accompanied by the operation regardless of whether the display mode is changed or not (in this example, the display position (for any specific display) The change suggestion effect executing means can execute the change suggestion effect at different rates depending on the operation mode of the specific display (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 By executing step S904508 using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 72 (C), when the operation frequency is high, the change effect (first change effect is compared to the case where the operation frequency is low). , Easy to carry out the second change effect). Thereby, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific display means can switch between the specific operation mode (in the present example, the advanced position) and the non-specific operation mode (in the present example, the retracted position) to display the specific display. In the example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can execute steps S904704, S904709, and S904710), and the operation mode of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is performed is the specific operation mode. The display mode can be changed (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904707 to S904713 to move the display position of the specific display to be subjected to the first change effect to the advanced position The display mode of the specific display can be changed. Thereby, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the change indication effect execution means includes a plurality of first change indication effects (in this example, first change effects) and a plurality of second change indication effects (in this example, second change effects). It is possible to execute any of the change suggestion effects of the type of change suggestion effects (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes one of the change effects by performing steps S908004, S908006, and S908105). The specific display means can switch between the specific operation mode (in this example, the advanced position) and the non-specific operation mode (in this example, the retracted position) and can display the specific display (in this example, the effect control micro The computer 90100 can execute steps S904704, S904709, and S904710), and a specific display when the first change suggestion effect is executed. The display mode of the specific display can be changed when the operation mode is the specific operation mode (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes the first change effect by executing steps S904707 to S904713). The display mode of the specific display can be changed when the display position of the target specific display which is the object is the advanced position) On the other hand, when the second change indication effect is executed, the specific display can be performed regardless of the operation mode of the specific display The display mode of can be changed (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904711 to S904713 so that the display position of the specific display to be subjected to the second change effect is the advanced position The display mode of the specific display can be changed regardless of whether it is the retracted position or not. Thereby, the rendering effect can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it can be suggested that the display mode of the specific display is controlled to the advantageous state (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 displays the display shown in FIG. 65 in steps S903906 and S903924). By determining the display mode pattern using the mode pattern determination lottery table, the display mode of the specific display is changed according to the operation mode of the specific display, indicating the reliability for the big hit (white <blue <red) by the display mode (In this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 determines the operation frequency by using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 72C in step S904508. Reliability against changes in the display mode of the specific display due to ) Was suggesting) that. Thereby, the rendering effect can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific display (specific display on the suggestion side) that suggests whether the display mode changes or not according to the operation mode and the specific display that suggests whether the display mode changes (proposed Is the same specific display as the specific display on the target side, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and even if the specific display on the suggested side and the specific display on the suggested side are different from each other. Good. For example, it may be suggested that the display mode of the specific display B displayed adjacent to the specific display A changes depending on whether the operation frequency of the specific display A is high.

  In the present embodiment, two types of change indication effects are provided, but only one type of change indication effects may be provided, or three or more types of change indication effects May be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is prioritized and executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls have won in the first start winning opening 9013 and the second start winning opening 9014. .

  Further, in this embodiment, although the hold change pattern and the change timing are determined by different lottery, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of data including information on the pending change pattern and the change timing (i.e., data in which the display mode is determined in advance at which timing is predetermined) are provided, and the pending change according to any data is It is also possible to determine whether to carry out by lottery.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, the display of the hold display is performed at a timing before the start of the next change when the hold display is started (for example, during the change being performed when the hold display is started). Although an aspect set it as the structure which can not change, it is not restricted to this, and it is possible to change the display mode of the hold display before the next change when the hold display is started is started. It is also good. For example, the display mode of the hold display may be changeable during the change being performed when the hold display is started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation frequency of the hold display is necessarily low from the start of the display of the hold display until the start of the next change, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, it may be always high frequency, or either high frequency or low frequency may be selected by lottery at the starting winning combination. In that case, it is desirable that the display mode of the hold display can be changed at a timing prior to the start of the next fluctuation when the hold display is started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation frequency of the specific display displayed at the start of the change is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of the number of pending storages actually stored, the operation frequency of all displayable specific indications (one active indication and four pending indications) may be determined at all times. For example, in consideration of the case where the start winning combination occurs and the third or fourth hold display is displayed during the change in which two hold memories are stored, the third or fourth advance is made at the start of the change. It is also possible to determine the operation frequency of all the displayable specific displays including the first hold display (determine all the operation frequencies of one active display and four hold displays at the start of each change) Good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the start-up winning command storage area in which the information regarding the hold display is stored and the active display storage area in which the information regarding the active display is stored are provided. The information on the pending display and the information on the active display may be stored in a common storage area. In that case, in steps S904501, S904503B, S904508, and S904702, the process is performed with reference to the common storage area.

  Further, in the present embodiment, although the presence or absence of the switching of the display position is determined by the lottery based on the operation frequency, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a fixed operation pattern (patterned to switch to which display position at which timing is provided) is provided for each operation frequency, and the display position may be switched based on the operation pattern. . For example, as an operation pattern for high frequency, an operation pattern which displays for 2 seconds at the withdrawal position and then repeats for 3 seconds at the advance position is provided, and as an operation pattern for low frequency, 5 seconds at the withdrawal position An operation pattern may be provided which repeats displaying for 8 seconds at the advanced position after being displayed.

  In addition, when determining the presence or absence of execution of change presentation, when the specific display in which the display mode is already changing is displayed, it is good also as raising the execution ratio of change presentation. For example, when the blue specific display is already displayed, the execution ratio of the change effect may be increased. As a result, the player can be expected to further change the display mode of the specific display whose display mode has already changed. In addition, in the gaming machine whose display mode can be changed to a plurality of stages, even if there is a specific display which has already changed to the final-stage display mode, even if the change effect for executing the specific display is executed Since it is not possible to give the player a sense of expectation, the execution of the change effect for which the specific display is to be performed may be limited.

  In the present embodiment, the operation frequency of the specific display is determined one by one. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation frequency of a plurality of specific displays may be determined collectively. For example, a combination of operation frequencies (high frequency, low frequency) in each specific hold may be selected.

  In the present embodiment, the display position of the specific display is forcibly switched according to the presence or absence of the change of the specific display which is the execution target of the first change effect (switching to the advanced position when changing, and changing) If it does not, switch to the evacuation position (refer to steps S904707 to S904710.) However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the display position of the specific display to be executed at the time of execution of the first change presentation is by accident the exit position (For example, when the display position is switched to the advanced position in step S904704), the display mode of the specific display may be changed. Specifically, the final display mode (to which display mode is changed) is determined at the start winning combination (in that case, the change timing is not determined), and the specific display is not yet changed to the final display mode. In contrast, when the first change effect can be executed, and the timing when the first change effect is executed matches the timing when the display mode of the specific display is controlled to the advanced position, the display mode of the specific display May be changed.

  In that case, even if the variation corresponding to the specific display is started (that is, when the active display is displayed as the specific display), the display mode of the active display is not changed to the final display mode. May be forced to change to the final display mode. Specifically, the first change effect may be executed, and the display position of the active display may be forcibly switched to the advanced position to change to the final display mode, or forced regardless of the display position. It is also possible to change to the final display mode by executing a change effect (a second change effect or any other change effect) for changing the display mode.

  In addition, the specific display may be displayed so that the movement is different depending on the display mode. For example, when the specific display is white, it is displayed as being rotated, displayed as jumping when it is blue, and displayed as running around when it is red.

  In the present embodiment, by determining the display mode pattern at the selection rate shown in FIG. 65, the reliability for changing to red is white <blue. For example, the percentage of big hit and small hit is extremely lower than the percentage of lost, and in general, the number of pending storages at the time of winning is 2 or more than that of 1 as shown in FIG. Focusing on the case where the determination result at the time of winning in the second display mode pattern determination lottery table in B) is SP reach loss or otherwise, Pt4 relative to the case where Pt1 'to Pt4' (display mode pattern including white color) is selected (Pattern that changes from white to red) and Pt3 '(R to change from blue to red) when Pt2' and Pt3 '(display pattern including blue) are selected The rate at which the pattern is selected is higher. Thus, blue is more likely to change to red than white.

  In addition, a change indication effect that suggests a change in the display mode of the changed specific display in which the display mode has already been changed, and a display of another specific display different from the changed specific display in a state in which the changed specific display is displayed. A change suggestion effect that suggests a change in aspect may be executable at least in part in a common aspect. Specifically, description will be made using the following modified example 1. The description of the same parts as those of the embodiment described above will be omitted.

  In the first modification, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can change the display mode of a plurality of specific displays. Specifically, the processes of steps S903904, S903905, S903922, and S903923 of FIG. 64 in the above-described embodiment (that is, the pending storage is newly added in a state in which the specific display of the display mode pattern in which the display mode changes) is already displayed. The display mode of the plurality of specific displays can be changed by not executing the process of changing the display mode pattern of the new suspension display to Pt1 ′ when it occurs.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory view showing a display example of the effect display device 9 when executing the second change effect in the first modification. For example, as shown in FIG. 78 (1), the active display 9051 and the three hold displays 9052 to 9054 are displayed as the specific display, and the display mode of the first hold display 9052 is blue, and the other display display The display mode of the specific display (active display 9051, hold display 9053, 9054) is white. Further, the display position of each specific display is a retracted position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 78 (1), the common second change effect (effect of releasing the arrow Y) is executed regardless of which specific display is to be performed.

  When the first hold display 9052 whose display mode has already changed to blue is to be executed, as shown in FIGS. 78 (2) and (3), the arrow Y hits the first hold display 9052. The display mode changes from blue to red.

  When the specific display different from the first hold display 9052 whose display mode has already been changed to blue (specifically, the second hold display 9053) is to be executed, FIG. As shown in 5), the arrow Y hits the second hold display 9053 and the display mode changes from white to blue.

  As described above, in the modification 1, the change suggestive effect executing unit is configured to display the changed specific display whose display mode has already been changed (for example, the first hold shown in FIGS. 78 (1) and (2)). Changed specific indication in a state where a change indication effect (for example, the second change effect shown in FIGS. 78 (1) and (2)) indicating the change of the display mode of the display 9052) and the changed specific display are displayed A change suggestion effect that suggests a change in the display mode of another specific display (for example, the second hold display 9053 shown in FIG. 78 (1), (4)) different from (for example, FIG. 4) The second change effect shown in (5) can be performed in a mode in which at least a portion is common (for example, a mode in which the arrow Y is flying as shown in FIG. 78 (1)) And As a result, it is possible to give surprise to the rendering content, and to improve the rendering effect.

  In addition, in this modification 1, the specific indication which a change suggestion effect performed in a mode in which at least a part is in common with the change suggestion effect which suggests a change of the display mode of a changed specific display has already changed Although it is stated that the hold display is adjacent to the specific display, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be a pending display or an active display not adjacent to each other.

  Further, in the first modification, the case has been described where a single changed specific display is displayed, but similar processing is executed even when a plurality of changed specific displays are displayed. It is also good.

  Moreover, although this modification 1 demonstrated using the example of the 2nd change production, it does not restrict to this, for example, the 1st which suggests the change of the display mode of the changed specific display in which the display mode was already changed. In a mode in which at least a part of a change effect and a first change effect that suggests a change in the display mode of another specific display different from the changed specific display in a state in which the changed specific display is displayed It is good also as performing (for example, it stops at the upper part of the specific display of execution object after displaying in the common aspect which moves a hammer right and left).

  In addition, the specific display means includes at least the normal mode, the first specific mode having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and the second specific mode indicating the content of the effect, at least for the specific display corresponding to the variable display. Can be displayed in the display mode of the second aspect, the effect of contents suggested by the specific display in the second specific mode can be executed, and after the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode, the specific display in the second specific mode When the effect of the content suggested by is performed, the display mode of the specific display may be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode. Specifically, description will be made using the following modified example 2. The description of the same parts as those of the embodiment described above will be omitted.

  In the second modification, as a display mode of the hold display displayed in the hold storage display unit 18c, a normal display mode indicating the reliability for a big hit (certain change / normal / sudden sudden change big hit) or a small hit, and a predetermined effect And a performance indication display mode that suggests the execution of.

  The normal display mode includes "white" displayed in white, "red" displayed in red, and "gold" displayed in gold, and a big hit (probability change / normal / sudden probability change big hit) or The reliability for being a small hit is gold> red> white.

  In the effect suggestion display mode, the first special suggestion mode that indicates that the special zone effect is to be notified by displaying the characters “special”, and the special zone effect by displaying the characters “special?” Displaying a second special suggestion mode that indicates that the subject is an advance notice, and a pseudo link suggestion mode that indicates that the pseudo ream is to be executed by displaying the letter “NEXT”; and a letter “SP” And SP suggestive mode suggesting development to super reach. The first special suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the special zone effect announcement is targeted, while the second special suggestion mode is selected regardless of whether the special zone effect is an advance objective or not It is a display mode to obtain. Also, the pseudo link suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when performing pseudo link, and the SP suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when developing into super reach.

  The special zone effect is an effect of displaying a special background different from the normal background by one change or a plurality of continuous changes. In addition, special zone rendition is configured to have higher reliability against big hit (certain / normal / sudden probability big hit) or small hit as the number of executions increases. Hereinafter, starting the execution of the special zone effect is sometimes referred to as "entering the special zone".

  Immediately before entering the special zone, a rush success effect is performed. The rush success effect indicates that the special zone is to be entered, and then indicates that it is determined that the special zone is to be entered (for example, “special zone chance!” And then “success!” Is displayed. ). In addition, when the player does not enter the special zone, the player may sometimes execute a rush failure effect which gives the player a sense of expectation by suggesting that the player enters the special zone. For example, after suggesting to enter the special zone as in the rush success presentation, an effect indicating that the special zone is not entered (for example, “special zone chance!” Is displayed and then “fail ...” is displayed. The effect can be implemented as a rush failure effect. Hereinafter, the rush success staging and the rush failure staging may be collectively referred to as “a rush notice presentation”.

  The rush advance presentation effect is an effect that is performed for three seconds from the start of the change. Then, when entering into the special zone, special zone effect is started 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation (at the end of the rush success effect). If the fluctuation time of the fluctuation for executing the rush advance presentation effect is shorter than 3 seconds, it is assumed that the rush advance announcement effect is forcibly terminated one second before the fluctuation stop. At that time, when entering into the special zone, the rush success effect is forcibly ended and the special zone effect is started.

  In the second modification, the display mode of the hold display and the active display is determined when the corresponding hold storage occurs (at the time of start winning). Specifically, when the start winning is generated, first, the change mode (hold change pattern and change timing) of the normal display mode is determined, and then it is determined whether or not to display in the effect suggestion display mode. When it is determined not to display in the effect suggestion display mode, the hold display is started in the normal display mode from the timing of the start winning combination. Moreover, when it is decided to display in the production indication display mode, the display of the suspension display is started in the presentation display mode from the timing at the start winning combination, and the presentation of the suggestion content is executed (for example, 5 seconds after starting special zone effects, 5 seconds after re-fluctuation in pseudo ream, 5 seconds after starting super reach), or when it is decided not to execute (for example, rush failure) When rendering is performed), it usually changes to a suggestion display mode.

  FIG. 79 is an explanatory view showing a display example in the case of displaying the hold display in the second special suggestion mode in the second modification; First, (1) While the active display 9051 and the two pending displays 9052 and 9053 are displayed, (2) a new pending storage occurs and the pending display 9054 corresponding to the pending storage is the second It is displayed in a special suggestion mode ("special?"). At this time, it is decided to execute a special zone effect which makes the reserved memory a notice target. Further, at this time, it is assumed that the hold change pattern changing from “white” to “red” and further changing to “gold” is determined, and the first and second change timings are determined.

  Then, the change ends at (3) deviation, and (4) the next change is started. At this time, the active display 9051 corresponding to the new change is displayed, and the hold display is shifted. Then, a rush notice effect is performed (image P is displayed). When 3 seconds have passed, (5) notification that the effect was a rush success effect (image P is switched and displayed) and rushes into a special zone (image Q is displayed). At the timing five seconds after that, (6) the display mode of the hold display 9053 displayed in the second special suggestion mode changes to "red".

  After that, although not shown, the fluctuation ends at a break and the next fluctuation is started. At this time, the active display corresponding to the new fluctuation is displayed, and the hold display is shifted. Then, the display mode of the hold display displayed in “red” changes to “gold”.

  As described above, in the second modification, the specific display means at least indicates the specific display corresponding to the variable display (in this example, the hold display and the active display) in the normal mode (in this example, “white”) ), The first specific mode (in this example, “red”) having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and the second specific mode (in this example, the stage suggestive display mode (first special suggestion mode) , The second special suggestion mode, the pseudo link suggestion mode, the SP suggestion mode))) (in this example, as shown in FIG. 79, “white” or “red”) And a second special suggestion mode that can display the suspension display), and an effect executing means capable of executing the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode (in this example, FIGS. As shown in 6), the special zone rendition suggested by the second special suggestion mode And the specific display means, after displaying the specific display in the second specific aspect, when the rendering of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific aspect is performed, The display mode can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (in this example, as shown in FIG. 79, the display is made in the second special suggestion mode 5 seconds after the special zone effect is started Hold display 9053 can be changed to "red". This can enhance the sense of expectation for the specific aspect.

  In addition, in this modification 2, although it was supposed that a single display mode ("white", "red") is provided as the "normal mode" and the "first specific mode", respectively, "the normal mode" and A plurality of display modes may be provided as at least one of the “first specific mode”. Moreover, although it was decided that a plurality of display modes (a first special suggestion mode, a second special suggestion mode, a pseudo link suggestion mode, an SP suggestion mode) are provided as the "second particular mode", the "second particular mode" "" May be provided a single display mode.

  In addition, the effects suggested by the “specific display of the second specific aspect” are not limited to those described above, but step-up notice effects that gradually develop, character notice effects in which characters appear, and dialogue effects that display words It may be any effect such as a button effect for prompting the player to operate the operation button 90120, an operation effect for changing the display mode of the hold display or the active display, and the like.

  Moreover, in this modification 2, although the display mode which suggests an effect by a character ("special", "special?", "NEXT", "SP") was made into the "2nd specific mode", a character, a button, or a pattern May indicate the content of the effect.

  In addition, in this modified example 5, five seconds after the start of the special zone effect, the pseudo continuous effect, or the super reach effect, “The specific display in the second specific mode is displayed, and then the specific display in the second specific mode "When the presentation of the content suggested by" is executed ", but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be timing when the rendering of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific aspect is performed, or timing before or after the timing.

  In addition, in the second modification, each effect is started “when the effect indicated by the specific indication of the second specific mode is executed after the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode”. Although we decided to unify after 5 seconds, it is not limited to this. For example, different timings are set in advance for each effect of the suggestion content (for example, if the effect of the suggestion content is a pseudo ream, 3 seconds after the pseudo ream start, if the rendition of the suggestion content is a super reach start 4 seconds after that), or one of a plurality of timings may be determined by lottery. When determining by lottery, it may be different depending on whether the lottery ratio is a big hit. As a result, an expectation can be given by the timing at which the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes from the second specific mode to the first specific mode.

  Further, in the second modification, the hold change pattern and the change timing are determined by different lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of data including information on the pending change pattern and the change timing (i.e., data in which the display mode is determined in advance at which timing is predetermined) are provided, and the pending change according to any data is It is also possible to determine whether to carry out by lottery.

  Further, the change timing of the display mode of the hold display or the active display may not be determined in advance. For example, whether or not the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed each time the fluctuation is started. May be determined by lottery. Also, the display mode after the change may not be determined in advance. For example, it may be determined by lottery at which change the display mode is to be changed.

  Further, in the second modification, the normal display mode and the effect indication display mode are determined by different lottery as the display mode of the hold display or the active display, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of change patterns of the display mode including the normal display mode and the effect suggestive display mode may be provided, and it may be determined which change pattern is used to change the display mode.

  Moreover, in this modification 2, although it was set as the structure which is not displaying in a normal display mode, when it is displaying the pending | holding display or the active display in a production | presentation suggestion display mode, it does not restrict to this. For example, if the hold display or active display of the normal display mode is displayed as an image having a lower display priority than the hold display or active display of the effect suggestion display mode, the hold display or effect display mode Even during display of the active display, the same display as that of the second modification can be performed without interrupting display control of the normal display mode (change control of the display mode at change timing).

  Moreover, in this modification 2, even if the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode, the effect executing means may not execute the effect of the content suggested by the specific display in the second specific mode (for example, Even when the special zone effect is not performed, the hold display or the active display can be displayed in the second special suggestion mode, that is, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode , There may be cases where the special zone effect which is the suggested content may not be performed.), And the specific display means is in the second specific mode even when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is not executed. The display mode of the specific display being displayed can be changed to the first specific mode (e.g. despite displaying the hold display or the active display in the second special suggestion mode) Koto even when not running zone effect, be changed to "red" is a first particular embodiment is) may be. This makes it possible to maintain a sense of expectation when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific aspect is not performed.

  Further, in the second modification, the specific display means can display the specific display in a first specific mode having a higher degree of expectation than the second specific mode (for example, a big hit or smaller than the second special suggestion mode) It may be possible to display a hold display or an active display in “red” which is highly reliable against hitting. This can enhance the sense of expectation for the first specific aspect.

  Moreover, in the second modification, the specific display means can display the specific display in the first specific mode having a higher degree of expectation than the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode (for example, It may be possible to display a hold display or an active display in “red” which is more reliable for being a big hit or a small hit than the special zone effect. This can enhance the sense of expectation for the first specific aspect.

  Moreover, in this modification 2, the specific display means can further change the display mode of the specific display changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (for example, the display mode of the hold display or the active display is It may be changed to "red" and further changed to "gold"). As a result, the sense of expectation for the display mode of the specific display after changing to the first specific mode can be enhanced.

  Moreover, in the second modification, the specific display means includes a plurality of second specific modes different in the content of the suggestion (in this example, the first special suggestion mode, the second special suggestion mode, the pseudo link suggestion mode, the SP suggestion mode) Specific display can be displayed, and the display mode of the specific display is changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode at different rates based on the type of the second specific mode (for example, “red” is included) The ratio of displaying in the effect indication display mode is different when it is a pending change pattern (other than P01), so that it changes to “red” at a different ratio depending on the type of the effect indication display mode It is good as well. Thereby, the display mode of the specific display can be noticed.

  In the second modification, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the pseudo link suggestion mode, the pseudo link effect is always executed with the corresponding change, but the present invention is not limited thereto. When the hold display or the active display is displayed in the suggestion mode, there may be provided a case in which the pseudo sequential effect is performed and a case in which the simulated continuous effect is not performed. Similarly, when the on-hold display or the active display is displayed in the SP suggestion mode, a case may be provided in which the super reach effect is performed and a case in which the super reach effect is not performed.

  In the second modification, it is possible to recognize (pre-reading) that the change is accompanied by one or two pseudo reams based on the change category command received at the start winning combination, and therefore, it is performed once. Alternatively, it is possible to execute the pseudo-link suggestion mode for the advance notice target of the change involving two pseudo-runs, but it may be possible to execute the pseudo-link suggestion mode even for the advance notice target of the change with three pseudo-runs. .

  In addition, as the change mode in the retention change pattern, not only the normal display mode but also the presentation indication display mode is included, and it is possible to collectively determine the change mode to the normal display mode and the presentation output mode. Good. For example, it changes from the "white" to the first special suggestion display mode, the hold change pattern from the second special suggestion display mode to the "red", and "white" to the pseudo link suggestion mode. Furthermore, a plurality of hold change patterns such as a hold change pattern changing to “red” and a hold change pattern changing from “white” to the SP indication display mode are provided, and which hold change pattern is selected You may do it.

  In addition, the hold change pattern may be determined using a common hold change pattern determination table regardless of the winning determination result, or a plurality of hold change pattern determination tables are provided and received. The pending change pattern may be determined using the pending change pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category command.

  Further, although the description is omitted in the second modification, it is determined at the time of the start winning combination that the fluctuation accompanied by the pseudo ream including the re-variation of a plurality of times is determined to display the suspension display in the pseudo relic suggestion mode In this case, it may be possible to determine at which re-fluctuation timing the display mode (for example, “red”, “gold”) changes from the pseudo connected suggestion mode to the normal display mode. For example, when it is determined to change the display mode at the first re-fluctuation timing, the execution of the pseudo reciprocate including one re-fluctuation is suggested by the pseudo reciprocity aspect, while the second rerun When it is determined that the display mode is changed at the fluctuation timing, the pseudo-repetition suggestion mode suggests execution of pseudo-run including two re-runs. That is, when it is determined at the start winning combination that it is a change accompanied by a pseudo ream including multiple rechanges, and it is determined to display the hold display in the pseudo relic suggestion mode, the pseudo It may be possible to decide whether to indicate the execution of a series or to indicate the execution of a pseudo-series including two re-variations.

  Further, a plurality of display modes may be provided as the pseudo link suggestion mode, and the number of re-variations may be suggested depending on which type of pseudo link suggestion mode is used to display the hold display. For example, in the case where the pseudo link suggestion mode A to C is provided and the pseudo link is performing one re-variation, the suspension display is easily displayed in the pseudo link suggestion mode A, and the re-variation is performed twice. In the case of a pseudo run, it is easy to display the hold display in the pseudo run suggestion mode B, and in the case of a pseudo run in which three re-variations are performed, it is easy to display the hold display in the pseudo run suggestion mode C. It is also good.

  Further, in the second modification, the special zone effect is started three seconds after the start of the change, but the start timing (inrush timing) of the special zone effect is not limited to this. For example, the special zone effect may be started at a timing of starting to change or at a predetermined timing during execution of a predetermined effect (for example, super reach effect). In addition, in the case of a change accompanied by a pseudo link, the special zone effect may be started at the first re-change timing or the second re-change timing. Further, it may be determined by lottery at which one of a plurality of timings the special zone effect is to be started.

  In addition, any control among the controls in the gaming machine shown in the above-described embodiment, the first modification and the second modification may be combined to provide an executable gaming machine.

  In addition, the specific indication of the second specific aspect is accompanied by an action, and the content suggested by the specific indication of the second specific aspect at a different rate depending on the operation aspect of the specific indication of the second specific aspect when the change suggestion effect is performed (Eg, the execution ratio of the special zone effect suggested in the second special suggestion mode varies depending on the display position of the specific display of the second special suggestion mode when the change effect is executed) It may be Thereby, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display of the second specific mode.

  Also, the specific indication of the second specific aspect is accompanied by an action, and the content suggested by the specific indication of the second specific aspect at a different rate depending on the operation aspect of the specific indication of the second specific aspect before the change suggestion effect is executed. (Eg, the execution rate of the special zone effect suggested in the second special suggestion mode varies depending on the operation frequency of the specific display of the second special suggestion mode before the change effect is executed) It may be Thereby, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display of the second specific mode.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the variation is started in order to notify the variation control microcomputer 90100 of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the variation time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of pseudo link 1 Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 90100 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notification by two commands, the gaming control microcomputer 90560 is before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip effect in the first command (if it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type and re-lottery effect (if it does not reach, so-called (2) after the stop may be transmitted a command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may perform effect control in the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 90560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 90100 selects a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. You may When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. In this way, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, “the proportions are different” means not only those having different proportions such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. A: B = 100%: 0% is a concept that includes different proportions (ie, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  In the above embodiment, for example, the case of variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of “1” to “9” and deriving and displaying the display result is shown, but the variable display is such an aspect Not limited. For example, the symbol to be variably displayed and the symbol to be derived and displayed do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the symbol displayed to be variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Moreover, it is not necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately repeating lighting and blinking of the one type of symbol display. And even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol is finally derived and displayed It may be one.

  In the embodiment described above, the gaming machine (so-called first-class gaming machine) is described which shifts to the big hit gaming state based on the variable display result of the special symbol and the production symbol, but the variable provided in the gaming area A gaming machine (so-called second-type gaming machine) that shifts to a big hit gaming state based on the fact that the gaming ball has won a prize (V prize) in a specific prize opening (V prize opening) in a prize ball device (so-called character) The present invention may be applied to a gaming machine in which the first type and the second type are combined.

  Further, in the present embodiment, transition to the probability change state is possible based on the type of the big hit that occurred, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special winning area is provided with a specific area through which the game ball can pass, and when the game ball passes through the specific area during a big hit, it shifts to a definite change state, while the big area hits the specific area May be transferred to the normal state when it does not pass. In that case, substantial probability variation big hit and non probability variation big hit may be realized by changing the ease of passage of the game ball to the specific territory with big hit classification. For example, the ease of passage of the game ball to the specific area may be changed by changing the opening time of the big winning opening depending on the jackpot type. Specifically, the big hit type long opening time of the big winning opening is a big hit (substantial probability variation big hit) where the game ball easily passes to the specific area, and the big opening type short opening type of the big winning game is played to a specific area It may be a big hit (a substantially non-probable big hit) in which the ball is difficult to pass.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 side determines whether or not to be a big hit, and the winning pattern determination (pre-reading determination) of the variation pattern type, and a command (pattern designation command indicating the winning determination result In the case of transmitting the change category command) and performing the prefetch notice effect on the side of the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the command indicating the result of the winning determination, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, for example Alternatively, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may be configured to perform the winning determination (pre-reading determination). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a command specifying only the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R ') or the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2') extracted at the occurrence of the start winning. Alternatively, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may be configured to perform the winning determination (prefetch determination) based on the value of the random number designated by the command.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control board 9080, the audio output board 9070, and the lamp driver board 9035 are provided as the substrate on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. However, the circuit for controlling the effect device is It may be mounted on one substrate. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) equipped with a circuit for controlling the effect display device 909 etc. and a circuit equipped with a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 9027 etc.) Two substrates with two effect control substrates may be provided.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly transmits the command to the effect control microcomputer 90100, but the game control microcomputer 90560 is connected to another board (for example, FIG. 29). (Sound / lamp board) having a function by the circuit mounted on the sound output board 9070, a lamp driver board 9035, or the like and a function by the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 9035. The control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100 in the effect control substrate 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through on another board, or the control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the sound output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. According to the above, the control relating to the voice control and the lamp control is executed, and further, the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. It may be sent to the Even in that case, the sound control board 9070 and the lamp driver are the same as the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs the display control according to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 90560 in the above embodiment. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the substrate 9035 or the sound / lamp substrate.

In addition, in (1) described above in the means for solving the problem, as an example of the change indication effect, a first change effect (a display effect in which a hammer is swung down toward a specific display to be targeted) and a second change Effects (display effects in which an arrow flies toward the target specific display), that is, effects by image display have been illustrated, but as change suggestion effects, instead of effects by image display, or in addition to effects by image display The effect may be produced by the operation of the movable means (a movable body such as a movable combination). Even when the change suggestion effect by the operation of the movable means is performed, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display. In particular, if a change suggestion effect by the operation of the movable means is performed in addition to the effect by the image display, the player can be made to pay more attention to the operation mode of the specific display.
Further, when the change suggestion effect is performed by the operation of the movable means, the effect assistance display may be performed in association with the operation of the movable means. By doing so, it is possible to further diversify the execution pattern of the presentation assistance display, and to prevent the decrease in the game entertainment.
In addition, although the display mode of the specific display is changed at a different ratio depending on the operation mode of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed, in addition to that, the operation of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed Depending on the aspect, the advantageous state may be controlled at different rates. That is, if the operation mode of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed is the special operation mode, the display mode of the specific display is easily changed as compared with the other operation modes and controlled to the advantageous state. On the contrary, it is difficult to change the display mode of the specific display as compared to other operation modes, but when the display mode of the specific display changes, it is compared to when the display mode of the specific display changes due to other operation modes. It may be made easy to be controlled to an advantageous state. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the operation mode of the specific display. Furthermore, if the operation mode of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is performed is a special operation mode, it may be determined to be controlled to the advantageous state. By doing so, the player can be made to pay more attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a game machine, but according to the present invention, a medal is inserted, a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types of game machines are operated according to the operation of the control lever by the player. When the combination of stop symbols turns to a specific symbol combination when the symbol is turned and the symbol is stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player, the predetermined number of medals are applied to the slot machine to be paid out to the player It is also possible.

  In the above embodiment, although the game machine uses game media as an example, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a game medium as a predetermined number of prizes, and a game ball The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed type game machine that seals game media such as, and gives a score when a prize giving condition is established.

  Also, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine is shown to be controlled to a definite change state after the big hit game based on the fact that there is a definite variation big hit or normal big hit as a big hit classification and a definite variation big hit as a big hit classification. Not limited to such gaming machines. For example, a special variable winning prize ball device having a predetermined probability variation area provided therein (a probability variation area may be provided in a special variable prize winning ball device provided with only one, or a plurality of special variable winning prize balls provided The probability change area may be provided in a part of the device, and the probability change is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed the probability change area in the special variable winning prize ball device during the big hit game, the big hit game The configuration described in the above embodiment can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a positive change state after completion.

  The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine which allows a player to play a predetermined game.

1 ... pachinko gaming machine 2 ... gaming board 3 ... gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... special symbol display device 5 ... image display device 6A ... ordinary winning ball device 6B ... ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Effect control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start port switch 23 ... Count switch 31A ... stick controller 31B ... push button 100 ... microcomputer for game control 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit 125 ... I / O
901 ... Pachinko gaming machine 908a ... 1st special symbol display 908b ... 2nd special symbol display 909 ... effect display device 9013 ... 1st start winning opening 9014 ... 2nd starting winning opening 9018c ... hold storage display portion 9018 d ... active display Part 9020 ... Special variable winning ball device 9031 ... Game control board (main board)
9056 ... CPU
90560 ... microcomputer for game control 9080 ... effect control board 90100 ... microcomputer for effect control 90101 ... CPU for effect control
90109 ... VDP

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of controlling in an advantageous state, comprising display means capable of performing variable display, comprising:
While performing the suggestion effect which suggests whether it will be controlled to the above-mentioned advantageous state by the mode of the effect performed by a predetermined production means, the presentation auxiliary display related to the suggestion effect can be executed by the display means Equipped with a certain suggestion effect execution means,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the effect auxiliary display at different positions depending on whether a specific condition is satisfied,
further,
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display in a mode accompanied by an operation and capable of changing the display mode of the specific display;
And a change indication effect execution means capable of executing a change indication effect that suggests a change in the display mode of the specific display,
A game machine characterized in that the specific display means can change the display mode of the specific display at a different rate depending on the operation mode of the specific display when the change suggestive effect is executed.